Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 1: Meeting new friends
- Lesson A: Meeting new friends - How are you today?
- Page: 8-9
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Introducing yourself & others
~ Saying hello & goodbye
~ Giving information about yourself & others
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce themselves & others, say hello
& goodbye & give information related to themselves & other people through speaking & writing
correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
Warmer/Review (5 mins)
Warmer:
1. Tells students that we are going Play „Buzz‟ 1. Listen carefully.
to play a game called „Play To focus on reviewing the
Buzz‟. students the numbers 1-20.
2. Gives instructions: 2. Listen carefully & raise
- Writes the number „2‟ on questions if they are not
the board. sure.
- Tells students to count up to 10,
but for every multiple of 2, they
say „buzz’ (e.g. 1, buzz, 3,
buzz,
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 1
 5, buzz…).

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 2

- Writes another number on the
board (e.g. 3)
- Tells students to count up to 20,
but for every multiple of 3, they
say ‘buzz’ (e.g. 1, 2, buzz, 4, 5,
buzz…).
- Puts students into groups of 4/5.
- Writes another number on the
board.
- In groups, students take turns
counting up one number at a
time, but for any multiple of
that number, they say ‘buzz’.
3. Gives a modeling. 3. Whole class tries on the game.
4. Gets students to play the game 4. Whole class plays the game.
for 3 mins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) 1. Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Meeting New Friends –
- What is the title about? How are you today?

2. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (2 mins) 2. Listen carefully & raise

- Asks students some questions Lead in questions if they are not
such as: what‟s your name? sure.
How old are you? How are you
to day? Where are you from?
- Gets students to ask the above
questions to their partner.
3. Asks instructions checking
questions & gives a time limit of 3. Whole class responds:
1 min.
- Would I like you to work alone
or in pairs? - In pairs
- How many minutes do you
have? - Have 1 min
- Whole class starts to work.
1. Gives instructions: Activity 2: (5 mins)
- Tells students to look at the Match 1. Look at the pictures
pictures & to say anything they
think they will hear about them.
E.g. he is a boy.
- Tells students they are going to - Listen carefully.
listen & match the names to the
pictures.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit 2. Whole class responds:
of 3 mins.
- What do I want you to do?
- How many times do you have? - Listen & match
- Have 3 mins
3. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partner. 3. Compare their answers with
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 3
 their partner.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 4

4. Asks & answer the questions as 4. Whole class responds.
the whole class.

1. Gives instructions: Activity 3: (5 mins) 1. Whole class responds:

- Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers - Listen carefully and raise
partner. questions if they are not
- Tells students to try to sure.
remember/guess who says the - Remember/guess.
sentences in activity 3. Do the
first one together as a class.
- Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Work in pairs & have 2 mins.
of 2 mins.
- Tells students to listen and
check. - Listen carefully.
- Tells students to compare their
answers with their - Compare answers.
partner/group.
- Asks and answers the questions - Whole class responds.
as a class.
Activity 3: (5 mins)
1. Tells students they are going to Students listen and repeat 1. Listen and repeat loudly.
listen and repeat after the tape.
Activity 4: (8 mins)
1. Puts students in group of 4. Tells Free practice 1. Listen carefully and raise
students to use the sentence questions if they are not
prompts in activity 7. sure.
2. Tells students to use their own
information. 2. Own information.
3. Tells students to take it in turns
introducing themselves. 3. Take turns introducing
4. Asks instruction checking themselves.
questions and gives give a time 4. Work in group of 4 & have
limit of 5 mins. 5 mins.
Activity 5: (5 mins)
1. Shows the picture of Miss Mom, Lead in and listening for the big idea
the teacher from the book. 1. Look at the picture.
2. Asks student guess who she is.
Use questions (e.g. Is she a 2. Answer
teacher? Is she Dara‟s friend?)
3. Tells students they are going to
listen to the conversation to find 3. Listen carefully.
out.
4. Asks instruction checking
question. 4. Listening
Activity 6: (3 mins)
1. Tells students to work a partner. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students to try and 1. Listen carefully
remember/guess what order 2. Remember/guess.
the sentences are in.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. 3. Work in pairs
4. Tells students to listen and
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 5
 check. 4. Listen

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 6

5. Tells students to compare 5. Compare answers
with their group/partner.
6. Asks and answers questions as a 6. Whole class responds
class.

1. Puts students in group of 3. Tells Activity 7: (8 mins) 1. Listen carefully & raise question
students to practice the Free practice if they are not sure.
conversations in their groups.
2. Asks instruction checking 2. Work in group of 3 & have 5
questions and give a time limit mins
of 5 mins.
3. If the groups finish early, tells 3. No groups should be quiet!
them to have the conversation
again! No groups should be
quiet!

Step IV:
1. Asks some questions from Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) 1. Listen carefully.
today‟s lesson. What‟s your name?
2. Listens to students‟ answers. How old are you? 2. Answer the questions.
Where are you from?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins) 1. Listen and take note of the
1. Gets students to write about Homework: homework.
themselves. 2. Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders:
list for unit 1 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! 3. Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 7

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 1: Meeting new friends
- Lesson B: Meeting new friends - My new friends
- Pages: 10-11
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Introducing yourself & others
~ Saying hello & goodbye
~ Giving information about yourself & others
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce themselves & others, say hello
& goodbye & give information related to themselves & other people through speaking & writing
correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
Warmer/Review (5 mins)
Warmer:
1. Tells students that we are going „Pass the ball‟ 1. Listen carefully.
to play a game called „Pass the To focus on introducing
ball‟. student‟s information.
2. Gives instructions: 2. Listen carefully & raise
- Students pass along a „ball‟ or questions if they are not
any object while sure.
singing/playing music.
- When the music stop, the student
holding the ball has to introduce
himself/herself (e.g. I am Phalla.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 8
 I‟m 13 years old.).
3. Gives a modeling. 3. Whole class tries on the game.
4. Gets students to play the game 4. Whole class plays the game.
for 3 mins.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (35 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: Meeting New Friends – 1. Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. My new friends
- What is the title about?
2. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (2 mins) 2. Listen carefully & raise
- Show students pictures of Review questions if they are not
Dara, Avorng, Sophal, and sure.
Bopha from the student‟s
book.
- Tells students to try and
remember as much as they can
about the characters. Students
should talk in their groups.
- Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 3 mins.
- Review information as a class. Activity 2: (10 mins)
1. Tells students they are going Personalization 1. Listen carefully & raise
to write and draw pictures of questions if they are not
themselves. sure.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit 2. In groups & have 5 mins.
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students to show and tell
their work in their groups. 3. Whole class starts to work.
Activity 3: (5 mins)
1. Gives instructions: Students read for the big idea
- Shows pictures of Dara and 1. Listen and raise questions if they
Sophall. have any.
- Asks: what is Sophall doing? - Look at the pictures
(Introducing about his friends.)
- Tells students they are going
to read quickly and find out. - Read quickly.
- Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Have 3 mins.
of 3 mins.
- Tells students to compare their
answers with their - Compare answers.
partner/groups.
- Asks and answers as a class.
Activity 4: (8 mins) - Whole class responds.
1. Does the first question together Students read for the answers
as a class. Have students to point 1. Point to the answers.
where the answer is in the text.
2. Tells students to do the other
questions in their notebooks. 2. Do other questions.
3. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 9
 questions and gives a time limit 3. Have 5 mins

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 10

 of 5 mins.
4. Tells students to complete. 4. Complete the blanks.
5. Tells students to compare their 5. Compare their answers
answers with their
partner/group. 6. Whole class checks
6. Checks answers as a class. and responds.
Activity 5: (10 mins) 1. Work in pairs.
1. Tells students to work with their Free practice
partner. 2. Write in notebook.
2. Tells students they are going to
write about their partner in their
notebooks. 3. Have 7 mins.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks some students some Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) 1. Listen carefully.
questions about their writing
2. Listens to students answer. 2. Answer the questions.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about Homework: 1. Listen and take note of the
his/her friend. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: 2. Listen and take note.
list for unit 1 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! 3. Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 11

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 1: Meeting new friends
- Lesson C: Meeting new friends – More friends
- Pages: 12-13
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Introducing yourself & others
~ Saying hello & goodbye
~ Giving information about yourself & others
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce themselves & others, say hello
& goodbye & give information related to themselves & other people through speaking & writing
correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
Warmer/Review (5 mins)
Warmer:
1. Tells students that we are going „Ball throwing‟ 1. Listen carefully.
to play a game called „Ball To focus on asking questions:
throwing‟. How are you today?
2. Gives instructions: What‟s your name? 2. Listen carefully & raise
- A student throws a ball to How old are you? questions if they are not
another one. What grade are you in? sure.
- That student has to ask questions Where are you from?
(e.g. How are you today? How
old are you?) and throw the ball
quickly to another one.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 12
- Tells students that the ball is hot
and if they hold it too long, they
lose and have to sit down!
3. Gives a modeling. 3. Whole class tries on the game.
4. Gets students to play the game 4. Whole class plays the game.
for 3 mins.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (35 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: Meeting New Friends – 1. Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. More friends
- What is the title about?
2. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (10 mins) 2. Listen carefully & raise
- Tells students to look at the True or False Game questions if they are not
photos and decide if the He is from Phnom Penh. (tick) sure.
sentences about them are true or His name is Dara. (cross)
false. She is 12 years old. (tick)
- Tells students to bet on how sure He‟s got 3 eggs. (cross)
they are! They‟re friends. (tick)
- Tells groups to take it in turns to
read the sentences and say how
much they bet for each.
- When all students have said their
bets, say if the sentence was true
or false.
- Students add and minus points as
they win and lose.
- The team that has earned the
most number of points at the end
of the game is the winner!
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit 3. Whole class responds:
of 4 mins.
- Do I want you to work alone or - In groups.
in groups?
- How many minutes do you
have? - Have 4 mins.
- Whole class plays the game.
1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 2: (7 mins)
2. Gives instructions: Speaking Practice game - Move in group of 4.
- Tells students that they are going - Listen carefully.
to paly a game and need
counters. Students can use
anything (erasers, pen, cap etc.)
as counter.
- Tells students to take it in turns
to drop the counter on the
pictures of the characters in the
book. Then they try to remember
who the characters are, and any
other information they can recall
(e.g. he‟s Dara. He‟s 13 years
old.)
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 13
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 14
3. Asks instruction checking - Each group plays the game.
questions and give a time limit
of 7 mins.

1. Tells students to work in groups Activity 3: (9 mins) 1. Work in groups of 4.

of 4. Speaking Practice
2. Tells students to take turns to Introducing a friend to the others 2. Listen carefully.
introduce one member of their group.
group. Can they remember Hello! He is Dara.
everything about them? He is my friend.
3. Asks instruction checking He is in grade 7. 3. Member of each group takes
questions and gives a time limit He is 13 years old. turns to introduce a friend to the
of 7 mins. He is from Phnom Penh. groups.

1. Tells the students to write about 1. Listen carefully.

Mr. Sovann using the Activity 4: (9 mins)
information in the box Writing Practice
individually. Writing about Mr. Sovann
2. Asks instruction checking e.g. Hello! This is Mr. Sovann. He is
questions and gives a time limit the school principal. He is 50 years
of 7 mins. old. He is tall. He likes ice cream
- Are you going to write about and he loves his school. - Mr. Sovann.
your friend or Mr. Sovann?
- Will you use your own words or - From the box.
the words from the box?

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the “can Assessment and Wrap-up (3 mins) 1. Listen, look at “can do”
do” statements. I can say my name. statements and pick up in the
2. Compare with a partner. I can say how old I am. boxes.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say hell and goodbye 2. Compare with partner.
about the “can do” statements. I can introduce my friends. 3. Respond.
Tells students not to worry
about the ones they don‟t tick.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about their Homework: 1. Listen and take note of the
mother. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: 2. Listen and take note.
list for unit 2 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! 3. Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 15

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 2: School around the world
- Lesson A: School around the world – Too cool for school
- Pages: 14-15
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Identifying buildings around your school
~ Talking about things that are / aren‟t in your school
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify buildings around their school &
describe things that are / aren‟t in their school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks students to look at the Warmer/Review 1. Look at the pictures carefully &
pictures and guess what they will Activity 1: (2 mins) answer.
be learning about this lesson. Lead in
(Schools)

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (43 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: school around the world – 1. Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Too cool for school
- What is the title about?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 16

1. Tells students to write a-f down Activity 2: (5 mins) 1. Listen carefully and raise
side of their notebook. New words questions if they have
2. Tells students they will look at any.
the pictures with their partner &
try and guess what the pictures 2. Look & guess.
are of.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit 3. Have 3 mins.
of 3 mins.
4. Students listen and check.
4. Listen & check.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 3: 3 mins)

picture. Students guess 1. Listen & look.
2. Asks them to talk to their partner 2. Guess & write.
about where they think they are
from: Malaysia, Australia or
Thailand. Tells students to write
their guess in their notebook.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit . 2. Have 1 min.
of 1 min.
4. Asks 2 or 3 students their ideas.
You might want to take a class 3. Respond.
vote to make things fun.

1. Gets students to listen. Activity 3: (4 mins)

2. Gets students to compare their Students listen for the big idea 1. Listen to the tape.
answers 2. Compare answers.
3. Asks students the answer.
(Australia) 3. Respond.

1. Tells students to write the letters Activity 4: (5 mins)

a-f in their notebooks. Students listen for the answers - Listen carefully & raise
2. Tells students they will listen questions if they have
and tick things that are in the any.
school and cross the things that
are not.
3. Asks instruction checking
instructions.
4. Gets students to listen.
5. Gets students to compare with
their partner/group. - Listen carefully to the tape.
6. Asks students the answers. - Compare answers.
- Respond.
1. Asks students to write 1-5 in Activity 5: (5 mins)
their notebooks. Controlled practice
2. Tells students that the words - Listen carefully & raise
they need are in exercise 1. This questions if they have
will help them with their any.
spelling.
3. Tells students to complete the
sentences alone.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 17
 - Work individually.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 18

4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Students compare with their - Compare answers.
partner/group.
6. Listen & check. - Listen carefully to the tape.
7. Tells students to listen again and - Repeat.
repeat after the recording.

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 6: ( 5 mins) - Look and complete.

grammar box and the sentences Grammar Presentation
and complete the rules.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Asks students to compare with - Compare answers.
partner/group.
4. Asks students as a class. Do not - Respond.
discuss Grammatical Terms
during feedback.

1. Tells students to write the Activity 7: (4 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
answers in their notebooks. Controlled practice questions if the have
2. Ask instruction checking any.
questions and gives a time limit - Write in notebook.
of 2 mins.
3. Asks students to compare with
partner/group. - Compare answers.
4. Students listen & check.
5. Students listen & repeat. - Listen & check.
- Listen & repeat.
1. Tells students to write the Activity 8: (5 mins)
answers to the questions in Writing Practice - Listen carefully and raise
Activity 7 in their notebooks. questions if they have
2. Asks instruction checking any.
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Write in notebook.
3. Students compare with
partner/group.
4. Students listen & check. - Compare answers.

1. Tells students now they will Activity 9: (2 mins) - Listen & check.
answer Bopha‟s questions. Students listen for the answers
Play the recording. - Listen & respond.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 10: (8 mins)

going to play a guessing game. Free Speaking Practice
2. Have one student help you - Listen carefully.
model the activity. Tell them to
choose one picture. Asks them - Modeling.
questions such as “Is there a
classroom?” Asks 3 questions.
Guess the answer. Asks “Am I
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 19
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 20
 right?
3. Tells students that they are - Listen carefully.
going to paly the same game in
groups of 4.
4. Asks instruction checking - Play in groups of 4.
questions and sets a time limit of
10 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks “Is there a classroom in our Assessment and Wrap-up (3 mins) - Listen & whole respond.
school?” Gets students to shout Is there a classroom in our school?
out the answer. Asks a few Is there a library in our school?
questions like this. Is there a football field in our
2. Tells students that they have school? - Thank to the teacher.
done a great job. Thanks
students who worked well in
group & helped their friends.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students that they are Homework: - Listen and take note of the
expected to have the homework homework.
completed by next lesson.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 2 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 21

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 2: School around the world
- Lesson B: School around the world – A world of schools
- Pages: 16-17
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Identifying buildings around your school
~ Talking about things that are / aren‟t in your school
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify buildings around their school &
describe things that are / aren‟t in their school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Tells students to stand up. Tell Step II: - Listen carefully and raise
them they are going to play a Warmer/Review questions if they have
game called „It bites‟. The rules Warmer: any.
of the game are that you throw „It bites!‟
the ball and say a country. But To focus on reviewing the names of
you are “out” if you 1) hold the the countries
ball for more than a second. 2)
say a country that someone else
has said. 3) drop the ball. 4)
throw the ball so that no one
can catch it.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Play the game until you have
a winner/time is up.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 22
4. Gives a modeling. - Whole class tries on the game.
5. Gets students to play the game - Whole class plays the game.
for 3 mins.
Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (35 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: School around the world - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. – A world of school
- What is the title about?
2. Writes: Malaysia, Canada, Lead in: (3 mins) - Look at the countries on the
Australia, English, and board.
Cambodia on the board.
3. Tells students to talk about what - Work in pairs.
they think the places are like
with their partners.
4. Asks students their ideas as a - Respond.
class.
1. Tells students to close the book. Activity 1: (2 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells students they are going Students guess questions if they have
to guess where the kids are any.
from. - Guess
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 1 min.
4. Students talk - Talking time
5. Asks students where they think - Respond.
the kids from around the world
are from. Activity 2: (5 mins)
1. Tells students they are going Students read/listen for the big idea - Listen carefully & raise
to read & listen. They need to questions if they have
match the text with the people any.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Listening & matching.
3. Gets students to do the exercise
individually. - Do individually.
4. Students compare with their
groups/partners. . - Compare answers.
5. Asks the students the answers as
a class. - Respond.
Activity 3: (10 mins)
1. Writes: She lives in Malaysia. Students read for the answers.
On the board. - Look at the board.
2. Asks Is it Jay? Students answer
no. Asks Is it Nita? Students - Respond.
answer no. Asks Is it Farah?
Students answer Yes. Asks
“what do I write here?” Students
answer: Farah
3. Gives students 5 mins limit.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Students complete.
6. Students compare with their - Complete.
group/partner. - Compare answers.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 23
7. Checks answers as a class.
- Respond.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 24

1. Tells students that they are Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully & raise
going to write about them but Taking notes questions if they have
first they will make notes, which any.
is an important part of the
writing process.
2. Tells students to take notes in
their notebooks. - Take notes in notebook.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Gives students 3 mins - Not taking note in full sentences.
limit.
1. Tells students to put their pens Activity 5: (15 mins)
down and look at you. Students write - Put their pens down.
2. Shows students how to do the
activity by starting it yourself: - Listen carefully to the teacher.
My name is Samuth. I‟m
from Cambodia. I‟m 27 years
old. I like my school. There is
a library…
3. Tells students to write about
themselves. If students finish - Write & draw.
before their friends, asks them to
draw a picture of them at their
school.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to put their pens Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Listen & put their pens down.
down. Asks them to read their
writing to their partner/group.
Sets a time limit of 2 mins.
2. Asks for 2 or 3 people to read - Read to the class.
to the class.
3. Tells students that they have - Thank to the teacher.
done a great job. Praises students
who tried hard to speak only in
English.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
brother/sister. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 2 on page 206 in the Reminders: - Listen and take note.
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 25

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 2: School around the world
- Lesson C: School around the world – My beautiful school
- Pages: 18-19
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Identifying buildings around your school
~ Talking about things that are / aren‟t in your school
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify buildings around their school &
describe things that are / aren‟t in their school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Students‟ books are closed. Step II: - Close the books.

Students look at you. Hold up Warmer/Review
the picture on page 18. Warmer/Lead in: (5 mins)
2. Tells students they are going to Activity 1: - Listen carefully and raise
play a game where they will questions if they have
write as many as words from the any.
picture as they can.
3. Asks students what they can
see in the picture. Writes 2 or 3 - Writing.
on the board. Sets a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Claps the hand at the end on the
time & says pen down. - Stop writing.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 26
6. Finds out who got the most. - Check the winner.
Finds who the winner is.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (40 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: School around the world - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. – My beautiful school
- What is the title about?
1. Students‟ books are closed. Activity 2: (5 mins) - Close the books & talk to their
Writes: a/an/some/any and Controlled Practice partner.
is/isn‟t/are/aren‟t on the
board. Asks students to talk to
their partner. Can they
remember when they are
used? - Complete.
2. Tells students to complete the
activity in their notebooks. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare. - Respond.
4. Asks students the answers as a
class.
Activity 3: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
1. Writes: there are some Writing
kangaroo. On the board. Do not
put period, a Capital letter, or an
S. - Respond.
2. Asks students “what‟s wrong?” - Listen carefully & raise
3. Asks students to work with a questions if they have
partner. Tells students they will any.
have 5 mins to write as many - Writing.
sentences about the picture as
they can, but they will not get a
point if they forgot S, Period, or
Capital letter.
4. At the end, clap the hand and tell - Stop writing.
students to put their pens down.
5. Checks writing. - Check writing.
Activity 4: (5 mins)
1. Asks students to look at the Students listen for the answers - Look at the pictures.
picture of Sophal. Can they
remember him?
2. Asks students to look at the - Listen carefully & raise
pictures. What are they? (do not questions if they have
speak in Khmer, the students can any.
use the pictures.)
3. Tells students that they are
going to hear about Sophal‟s
dream school. .
4. Tells students to tick the things
there are and cross the things
there aren‟t. - Tick & cross.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.
6. Students listen.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 27
7. Students compare.
- Listen to the tape.
- Compare answers.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 28

8. Checks answers as a class. - Respond.

1. Asks students to listen again. Activity 5: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

Is there on or more than one?
2. Students listen. - Listen again.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Respond.

1. Tells students to guess what Activity 6: (6 mins) - Look at the picture & guess.
you are drawing. Draw your Brainstorming
school. Just do a quick picture.
2. Tells students that they have 5 - Drawing session.
mins to draw their dream school.
3. Asks students to talk to their - Talk to partner.
partner about their picture.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 7: (9 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Tells students to show their Speaking practice - Share information of picture.
picture to their partner and tell
them about it.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the “can Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Listen & look at the “can do”
do” statements. I can say the things in my school. statements.
2. Compare with a partner. I can say the things not in my - Compare with partner.
3. Asks students how they feel school. - Respond.
about the “can do” statements.
Tells students do not worry
about the ones they don‟t
tick.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
classroom. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 3 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 29

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 3: Why are you so naughty!
- Lesson A: Why are you so naughty! – What‟s wrong?
- Pages: 20-21
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Responding to classroom commands.
~ Talking about what you should / shouldn‟t do.
~ Asking questions to clarify basic information.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to respond to their classroom commands &
know what they should / shouldn‟t do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Says: Do you know what Step II: - Respond.

naughty means? Warmer/Review
2. Holds up the book so that Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen & look at the pictures
students can see. Tells them that Warmer/Lead in/Students guess carefully and raise questions
they are going to look at the if they have any.
picture & talk to their group.
They have to remember who the
kids are & see who is being
naughty in each picture.
3. Ask instruction checking - Work in groups.
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Asks students the answers as a - Whole class responds.
class.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 30
 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (42 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: Why are you so naughty - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. – What‟s wrong?
- What is the title about?
1. Tells students they will listen Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen to the teacher.
and point to the pictures as they Students listen for the big idea
hear about them.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students listen. - Listen carefully to the tape.

1. Tells students to put down their Activity 3: (5 mins) - Listen & put their pens down.
pens and look at you. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students they are going to - Do the activity 3.
try and remember who should do
the things in activity 3. They
will write 1,2,3,4 down the side
of their notebook and work with
a partner.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Students listen & check the - Listen & check.
answers.
5. Asks students the answers as a - Respond.
class.
1. Tells students to put down their Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully & raise
pens & look at you. New words questions if they have
2. Tells students to cover the any.
words and see if they can guess
what new words the pictures are
of in their groups.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Gives students a minute to try &
remember. - 1 min to try & remember.
5. Tells students that they will
write a-f in their book and then . - Match the words & pictures.
try to match the picture and
words.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
7. Tells students they will listen to
the recording to check their
answers.
8. Students listen & check.
9. Students listen again & repeat. - Listen & check.
- Listen & repeat.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 31

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 32
1. Tells students to stand up and Activity 5: (5 mins) - Stand up
look at the teacher. Practice new words – Sok says! - Listen carefully & raise
2. Says that you will let them to do questions if they have
the things, but they should do any.
only if you say „Sok says!‟
3. There are rules: if a student is
too slow, they are dead. If - Whole class starts the game.
students do sth, but you do not
say Sok says! , they are dead.
If they do not do sth, but you
say Sok says!, they are dead.

1. Tells students to form groups 4 Activity 6: (5 mins)

and play the game. Practice new words – Sok says! - Form groups of 4.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. Make sure that - Whole class starts the game.
everyone has a turn to at
being Sok!

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 7: (3 mins)

picture and to tell their partner Listening - Listen & look at the picture,
what they think is happening in
the picture.
2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.
- Start to tell partner.
1. Tells students to compare with Activity 8: (2 mins)
partner. Point to the picture Compare - Point & say.
and say the sentence.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 min.

1. Tells students to have everything Activity 9: (2 mins)

out of their hands so they can Drill - Prepare before listening.
listen well.
2. Tells students to listen &
repeat after the recording. - Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to work with their Activity 10: (10 mins)

group. Free speaking practice - Listen carefully & raise
2. Tells students to write the group questions if they have
member names on a piece of any.
paper.
3. Tells students to take it in turns
to be the teacher and ask
“What‟s this” questions.
4. The first student in their group to
answer and gets a point.
5. Gives students 5 mins to play
the game. Once a minute yell - Play the game.
Change Teachers! So everyone
has a turn at being the teacher
and the student.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 33
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 34
 Step IV:
1. Tells everyone to listen to you. Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) - Listen
2. Asks: What‟s this? Questions. - Respond.
Calls on the students for the
answers. Asks a few questions
like this.
3. Tells students that they have - Thank to the teacher.
done a great job. Thanks
students who spoke consistently
in English.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write what they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
should do as a good child. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 3 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 35

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 3: Why are you so naughty!
- Lesson B: Why are you so naughty! – What‟s in the bag?
- Pages: 22-23
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Responding to classroom commands.
~ Talking about what you should / shouldn‟t do.
~ Asking questions to clarify basic information.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to respond to their classroom commands &
know what they should / shouldn‟t do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Tells students to stand up. Step II: - Stand up.

2. Tells students that they will play Warmer/Review (7 mins)
a game to test their spelling. Warmer: „Spelling ball‟
3. Rules: Tells students the rules. - Listen & look at the pictures
Students who make a mistake carefully and raise questions
must sit down. If a student drops if they have any.
the ball, they must sit down. If a
student does a “bad throw” they
must sit down.
4. Puts class in two teams (left side
vs right side).
5. Says a word and throw the
ball to one of your students.
(e.g.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 36
 Pen)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 37

6. The student says the first letter
of the word (e.g. P) and throws
the ball to a classmate on the
other team.
7. The student has to say the - Start to play the game.
second letter (e.g. E) and throws
throw the ball to the other team.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (48 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: Why are you so naughty – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. What‟s in the bag?
- What is the title about?

1. Asks students if they know Activity 1: (2 mins) - Listen to the teacher.

what a twin is. If they do not Lead in/students guess
know, tell them. Asks if anyone
knows any twins.
2. Tells students to look at the - Listen carefully and raise
picture. Asks the students if the questions if they have
bags are the same or different. any.
3. Tells students to work with their
partner. Can they name the
things in the bags?
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a minute to
do this.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins)

going to listen and decide if Students read and listen for the big - Listen carefully and raise
Din‟s bag is A or B. tells idea questions if they have
students to read and listen and to any.
follow the text with their finger
as they listen.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions
3. Students read and listen.
4. Students compare their answers. - Read & listen.
5. Asks for answers as a class. - Compare answers.
Activity 3: (10 mins) - Whole class responds.
1. Whites: Who has an apple? Students read for the answers
Points to Din‟s bag and asks - Look at the board & respond.
Does Din has an apple? Students
“No”. Writes: No one has an
apple.
2. Tells students to answers the
questions in their notebooks. - Answer in notebook.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Students compare answers.
5. Asks for answers as a class. - Compare answers.
- Respond.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 38
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 39
1. Tells students that they are Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen & respond.
going to find the rule. Asks: I Grammar
have an orange or I has an
orange. Tells students to look at
the text to help.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Students compare. - Compare answers.
4. Asks for answers as a class. - Respond.

1. Tells students to talk to their Activity 5: (5 mins) - Talk to partner.

groups/partners. They do not Grammar
have to do this in their notebook.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Asks for answers as a class. - Whole class responds.

1. Tells students that they have 4 Activity 6: (5 mins) - Write 5 sentences.

mins to write sentences about Post Task – writing
what is in their bag. They must
write 5 sentences.
2. Checks writing. - Check writing.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 7: (3 mins) - Listen & look at the picture.
picture. Students look at a model of the next
2. Asks: What is she doing? activity - Respond.
3. Listen & check ( answer: playing
a game) - Listen & check.

1. Asks students to guess the rules Activity 8: (2 mins) - Listen & discuss.
of the game. They do not have to
write – only discuss with their
partner.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 min.
3. Students compare. - Compare.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Whole class responds.

1. Tells students to listen & repeat. Activity 9: (1 mins) - Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students they get 1 point Activity 10: (10 mins) - Listen carefully & raise
for everyone they will find who Free speaking practice questions if they have
is the same as them. any.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions about the game.
3. Asks students to play the game.
If you have enough room for - Play the game.
students to move around,
encourages them to ask as many
as possible.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 40
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 41
 Step IV:
1. Tells students to sit back down Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) - Listen carefully.
and count their points.
2. Finds out who got the most - Count the things in the bag.
points in the class. Asks: What
do you have in the bag and find
out if the student has cheated.
(This is supposed to be funny
not serious)
3. Tells students that they have - Thank to the teacher.
done a great job. Thanks
students who spoke consistently
in English.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write what they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
should do as a good student. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 3 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 42

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 1: At a new school
- Unit 3: Why are you so naughty!
- Lesson C: Why are you so naughty! – Yes, you should!
- Pages: 24-25
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Responding to classroom commands.
~ Talking about what you should / shouldn‟t do.
~ Asking questions to clarify basic information.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to respond to their classroom commands &
know what they should / shouldn‟t do through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

2. Tells them they have to choose 1 Warmer/Review (5 mins) questions if they have
person to be the writer. Tells Warmer/Lead in any.
students that they will have a
time limit to think of as many
things as they can that they have
in common.
3. Writes an example on the board.
(e.g. we live in Phnom Penh.). - Work in groups of 4.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives the groups a
3 mins limit
5. At the end of three mins, clap
your hand and tells them to put - Stop writing.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 43
 their pens down.
6. Who has the most sentences? - Check writing.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (42 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: Why are you so naughty – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Yes, you should!
- What is the title about?

1. Tells students to cover the text in Activity 1: (2 mins) - Listen & cover the books.
their textbooks. Students guess
2. Tells students to look at the - Look at the picture.
picture.
3. Have students shout out their - Guess & say.
guesses. Do not say if the
guesses are right or wrong.
4. Asks students to guess Who is s - Respond.
good student?
5. Make sure that students know
who is supposed to be the
“naughty” student.
6. Asks how they think the boys
know each other. (They are
twins.)

1. Tells students that one of the Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
twins is called Dy and that they Students read/listen for the big idea questions if they have
will read and listen to find out any.
who Dy is. Says Is Dy the
good student or naughty
student?
2. Students listen and read. - Read & listen.
3. Students compare their guesses. - Compare answers.
4. Asks for answers as a class. - Whole class responds.
Activity 3: (10 mins)
1. Tells students to close the books. Students read for the answers - Close the books.
Eyes on you.
2. Writes: Is Din naughty? On the - Look at the board & answer.
board. Asks students: Is Din
naughty? Students: No! Try and
make them say the full sentence.
3. Tells students to continue - Write in notebook.
writing full sentences in their
notebooks
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. .
5. Students compare their answers. - Compare answers.
Activity 4: (5 mins)
1. Tells students to look at the Preparing to write - Look at the picture & talk.
picture and talk to their group.
2. Tells them to try and guess who - Look & guess.
Dy is in the pictures, and who
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 44
 Din is. (Dy‟s twin)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 45

3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Asks answers as a class. - Respond.
5. Tells students to talk to about
what they think the teacher
might say in each picture.
6. Do the first one together. “Sit
down”.
7. Asks for answers as a class. - Whole class responds.

1. Asks students what Din‟s Activity 5: (10 mins) - Look at the picture.
twin should do in picture 1. Writing - Respond.
2. Writes: He should on the board.
Students yell sit down.
3. Writes: He should sit down on
the board.
4. Tells students to write the rest - Write in notebooks.
of the sentences in their
notebooks. Tells students there
are many possible answers.
5. Students compare. - Compare answers.
6. Asks for answers as a class. - Whole class responds.

1. Have students look at your bag. Activity 6: (10 mins) - Look and answer.
Asks what do I have in my Speaking
bag? Students yell ideas (e.g. a
pen)
2. Make students say the full
questions, and write it on the
board. Do you have a pen? - Listen carefully and raise
3. Tells students that they will play questions if they have any
a game. They will play with
partners: One partner is students
A, and another one is student B. - Raise the hand.
4. Asks student A to raise their
hand - Raise the hand.
5. Asks student B to raise their
hand.
6. Tells students that they will both
have pictures. The pictures are
different. They will have to ask
“Do you have…” questions to
try and find out everything in
their friend‟s bag.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 5 mins. - Turn to page 230.
8. Tells student A to turn to page
230. - Turn to page 237.
9. Tells students B to turn to page
237. - Play the game.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 46
10. Have students play the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 47

11. Tells students who finish early to - Write the 5 winning questions.
write the 5 winning questions in
their notebooks.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the “can Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Look at the can do statements.
do” statements. I can say what people should do and
2. Compare with a partner. shouldn‟t do in class. - Compare statements.
3. Asks students how they feel I can ask questions with “Do you
about the can do statements. have”. - Respond to the teacher.
I can say what I have.
I can do what the teacher says in
class.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write what they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
should do as a good friend. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 4 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 48

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 4: I study English!
- Lesson A: I study English! – What time do you have class?
- Pages: 26-27
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about which classes you‟re taking and when.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able talk about which classes they‟re taking
and when through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Reviews the days of the week. Step II: - Review the days of the week.
2. Pre-teach the words loud, quiet Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Learn words.
and whisper. Warmer: - Listen carefully and raise
3. Introduces hand signs to match Activity 1: Play „Say it differently‟ questions if they have
the words (e.g. loud – cup hands any.
around mouth, quiet – place
finger against lips, whisper – put
hands behind ears).
4. Use body language to signal
whether students should say the - Play the game.
days of the week loudly,
quietly, or by whispering.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 49

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: I study English! – What - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. time do you have class?
- What is the title about?

1. Asks students what subjects they Activity 2: (5 mins) - Respond.

study at school. Lead in and Students guess - Listen carefully and raise
2. In pairs, tells them to look at the questions if they have
photos in activity 2 and identify any.
which subjects the photos
represent.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
- Are you speaking or writing?
4. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. - Speaking.
5. Tells students to listen and
check. - Listen & check.
6. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students to close their Activity 3: (3 mins)

books. Students listen for the big idea - Close the books.
2. Tells students that they are
going to listen to Dara talking - Listen to Dara.
about his classes at school.
3. Asks Are they the same as
yours? - Respond.
4. Asks some ideas from the class.

1. Tells students to listen again and Activity 4: (10 mins)

complete the table. Students read for the answers - Listen & complete the table.
2. Tells students to write
answers in their notebooks. - Write in notebook.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions
- Do you write your answers in
notebooks or books? - Notebook.
4. Give a time limit of 6 mins.
5. Check answers as a class.
- Check answers.
1. Gets students to listen and Activity 4: (5 mins)
repeat. Students listen and repeat - Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students to make their own Activity 5: (10 mins)

timetables in their notebooks. Freer practice - Listen carefully.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
- Are you writing about your
friend or your timetable? - Timetable.
3. Gives a time limit of 8 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 50

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 51
1. Pus students in pairs. Activity 6: (8 mins) - Work in pairs.
2. Tells them to ask and answer Speaking - Ask & answer questions.
about their own timetable with
their partners.
3. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some questions from Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Respond.
today‟s lesson. What time do you study maths?
2. Listens to students‟ answers. What time do you study Geography?
What time do you study Physics?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write why they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
study English. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 4 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 52

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 4: I study English!
- Lesson B: I study English! – What time do you have class?
- Pages: 28-29
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about which classes you‟re taking and when.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able talk about which classes they‟re taking
and when through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

2. Puts students into groups. Warmer/Review (7 mins) questions if they have
3. Each group chooses a month. Warmer: any.
4. Each group takes it in turns to Play „Month chant‟
say the chant (e.g. J for January, To focus on reviewing the months of - Whole class plays the game.
J for January, J for January to S the year
for September, S for
September, S for September, S
for September, September to D
for December, etc.).

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 53

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (45 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: I study English! – What - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. time do you have class?
- What is the title about?

1. Draws a clock on the board Activity 1: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
(e.g. 7.00, 8.30, 10.00). Review
2. Asks students the times. - Respond.
3. Says the times (o‟clock and
half past only).
4. Calls some volunteers to draw - Draw the clock.
the times you say on the board.
5. Shows the clock in Activity 1.
6. Asks: which side do we use - Respond.
quarter past? Which side do we
use quarter to?
7. Draws the first clock together as
a class (e.g. 9.45).
8. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
9. Asks students to work in pairs to - Draw the rest of the clocks.
draw the rest of the clocks.
10. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Shows students the photo of Activity 2: (4 mins) - Look at the photo

Jacky in activity 2. Lead in and students guess
2. Asks about Jacky (e.g. - Respond.
what‟s her name? How old is
she? Where is she from?
3. Have a class vote. (e.g. How
many students think she is 14
years old?)

1. Tells students to match the Activity 2: (5 mins) - Match the words with
words with the photos. New words the photos.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Gives a time limit of 3 mins.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Says: This is Jacky. Now read Activity 3: (5 mins) - Read carefully.

about her. Do you like to study Students read for the big ideas
in the same way as Jacky? Tests
students to read quickly for the
answer.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare their answers
with their partners.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 54
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 55
4. Asks some ideas from the class. - Respond.

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 4: (5 mins) - Read the text again.
again and put a tick or cross next Students read for the answers
to the sentences.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Points to Marshy‟s photo Activity 5: (8 mins) - Look at the photo.

in activity 5. Writing
2. Tells students Marshy is not - Listen & respond.
from Earth. Asks questions (e.g.
Is Marshy from Cambodia? Is he
from Australia? Is he from the
USA? )
3. Points to the photo of the solar - Respond.
system and asks students
where we are (Earth). Picks a
strong student to do this.
4. Says that Marshy is from one of - Guess & respond.
the planets moving around the
sun. Can they guess? Points to
the planet Mars.
5. Tells students to write about - Write about Marshy.
Marshy using the timetable. Do
the first answer together as a
class.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit f
5 mins.
7. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with their partners.
8. Asks and answers the questions - Ask & answer.
as a class.

1. Tells students they will play a Activity 6: (8 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
game in pairs. One is the Speaking and listening-categorising questions if they have
writer and one is the speaker. any.
2. Tells students to draw a table in
their notebooks. - Draw a table.
3. The speaker reads words found
in activity 6. The writer writes - Do the activity.
the words into his/her notebooks
under the correct headings.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. After 3 mins, students
swap roles. - Swap the roles.
6. Students compare notes.
- Compare notes.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 56
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 57
 Step IV:
1. Asks some students to talk about Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Talk about the results of the
the results of their game. What time do you study maths? game.
2. Listens for pronunciation. What time do you study Geography? - Pronoun the words.
3. Tells students they have done a What time do you study Physics? - Thank to the teacher.
great job. Thanks students who
worked well in groups and
helped their friends.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
favourite months of the year. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 4 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 58

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 4: I study English!
- Lesson C: I study English! – I love Sundays!
- Pages: 30-31
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about which classes you‟re taking and when.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about which classes they‟re
taking and when through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- The teacher whispers a word to a Warmer/Review (7 mins) questions if they have
student on the first row. Warmer: any.
- The student in turn, whispers to Play „Whispers‟
the next student, until the last
student at the end of the row.
- The last student either shouts the
word or writes it on the board. - Whole class plays the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 59

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (38 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: I study English! – I love - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Sundays!
- What is the title about?

1. Tells students to order the Activity 1: (6 mins) - Order the days of the week.
days of the week in their Review
notebook.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare with their
groups/partner. - Check answers.
4. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 2: (6 mins) - Look & respond.
1. Points to the picture of the Review
world. Asks: What subject is
this? - Write in notebook.
2. Tells students to write the
subjects in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins. - Compare answers.
4. Students compare with their
groups/partner. - Check answers.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 3: (7 mins)
Students listen and match - Listen & match.
1. Gets students to listen and
match.

Activity 4: (7 mins) - Respond.

1. Asks: What did Avorng Speaking
say? Students: I play with
my egg everyday! - Work in pairs.
2. Puts students in pairs. - Take in turns.
3. Tells students to take it in turns
to remember what each of the
character said.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Check answers.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 5: (12 mins) - Work in pairs.
1. Students work in pairs. Student Speaking
A turn to page 230. Students B
turn to page 237. - Take turns.
2. They take it in turns to say the
times and draw clocks to show
the times.
3. Gives a time limit of 8 mins.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 60
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 61
 Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the “can Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Look at the can do statements.
do” statements. I can tell the time.
2. Compare with a partner. I can say some of my subjects. - Compare with friends.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say what time I study.
about the “can do” statements. I can say the days of the week. - Show the feeling.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
favourite subjects. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 5 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 62

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 5: I study English!
- Lesson A: Study habits – I love school!
- Pages: 32-33
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your study habits and how often you do them.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits and how
often they do them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Writes „Japan‟ on the board. Step II: - Look at the board.

2. Tells students to talk about what Warmer/Review (2 mins) - Talk about Japan.
they know about Japan. Warmer/Lead in
3. Asks some students what they - Respond.
spoke about.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (44 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: Study habits – I love - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. school!
- What is the title about?

1. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (3 mins) - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to look at the Students guess questions if they have
picture of Hiroko. any.
- Asks „Where is she from?‟

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 63

 - Japan.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 64

- Asks where she is. - School.
- Tells students to write their
guess about what Hiroko loves.

1. Tells students to listen. What Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

does Hiroko love? Students listen for the big idea
2. Asks instruction checking
questions
3. Tells students to listen. - Listen to the tape.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare answers.
with their partners.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Gives instructions: Activity 3: (3 mins) - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to look at activity Students guess the answers questions if they have
3. any.
- Tells students that they are
going to talk to their partner. - Talk to partner.
- Asks students to match the
sentence halves. - Matching.
- Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 3 mins.
- Tells students to write numbers
1-8 in their notebooks.
- Asks students to listen and write - Listen to the tape.
the letter next to the number.
- Students compare their answers. - Compare answers.
- Asks answers from the class.
- Respond.
1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (5 mins)
pictures. Tells them to cover the New words - Look at the pictures & cover
text and talk to their partners. the text.
2. Do they know the words?
3. Tells students to talk to their
partners and point to the pictures - Talk to partner.
and words. Gives them 2 mins to
do this. Do not translate for the
students.
4. Tells students to listen and
check. - Listen & check.
5. Tells students to listen and
repeat. - Listen & repeat.

1. Asks students to cover the Activity 5: (5 mins)

exercise 6 and to look at the Students guess - Cover the exercise 6 and look at
picture. the picture.
2. Says: Can you remember this
girl? What can you remember? - Respond.
3. Tells students to talk to their
partners. - Talk to partner.
4. Give a time limit of 1 min.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 65

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 66
1. Says: Let‟s read! Tells Activity 6: (5 mins) - Read
students to read with the Controlled practice
teacher.
2. Asks students How old is - Respond.
Bopha? Let‟s guess!
3. Tells students to talk with their - Talk with partner.
partners and try to use the
pictures to complete the
passage about Bopha.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & compare.
compare.
Activity 7: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Taking notes
going to write about themselves,
but first they will take notes. - Write in notebook.
2. Asks students to write in their
notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 3 mins.
Activity 8: (10 mins) - Listen carefully & raise
1. Tells students to use their notes Writing questions if they have
to write a piece about them any.
similar to activity 7.
2. Tells students that they need to
keep their writing secret for the
next activity and not to write
their name.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins. Activity 9: (5 mins)
1. Tells students that make sure Speaking - No writing the name on the
they do not have their names on paper.
their papers.
2. Collect all the papers.
3. Asks students to come up to
you and collect a paper, but if it
is their own they should put it
back.
4. Tells students to find the owner - Respond.
of their paper by asking
questions from the note taking
stage.
Step IV:
1. Asks people whose paper they Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) - Respond.
had, and how they found them.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 67

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 68
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
activities they usually do after homework.
getting up in the morning.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 5 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 69

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 5: I study English!
- Lesson B: Study habits – Are you a good student?
- Pages: 34-35
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your study habits and how often you do them.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits and how
often they do them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (5 mins) questions if they have
- Tells students that they are going Warmer: any.
to play a game to test their ABC ball
spelling. To focus on students‟ spelling.
- Put class in two teams – left side
of the room vs right side of the
room. Have students move to
their side of the room (left or
right) as much as you can (with a
smaller class), you can do this at
the front on the room in front of
the whiteboard.
- Students who make a mistake
must sit down. If a student drops
the ball, they must sit down. If a

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 70

 student does a bad throw, they
must sit down.
- Says a word and throw the
ball to one of your students.
(e.g.
Pen!)
- The student says the first letter
of the word (e.g. P) and throws
the ball to a classmate on the
other team.
- The student has to say the
second letter (e.g. E) and throw
the ball to the other team. - Whole class plays the game.
- Rules: students who make a
mistake must sit down. If a
student drops the ball, they must
sit down. If a student does a bad
throw they must sit down.
Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (39 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: Study habits – Are you a - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. good student?
- What is the title about?

2. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (2 mins) - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to cover the text in Lead in/Students guess questions if they have
their books. any.
- Tells students look at the picture.
- Asks students if they can
remember the boys‟
names.
- Asks students to guess: Who is a - Respond.
good student? Who is naughty?
Activity 2: (5 mins)
1. Tells students they are going to Students read/listen for the big idea - Listen carefully.
read and listen and decide
which is Dara and which is
Sophal.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Read & listen.
3. Students read and listen. - Compare answers.
4. Students compare their guesses. - Check answers.
5. Asks for answers as a class. Activity 3: (10 mins)
Students read for the answers - Listen carefully and raise
1. Tells students to look at the questions if they have
table. Says who does homework any.
none of the time? (Dara) asks
students how they know.
2. Have students point to the
sentence in the text.
3. Tells students to draw the table
quickly in their books and fill
the rest of the table. Gives 5
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 71
 mins for this.
4. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 72

 questions.
5. Have students complete. - Complete the table.
6. Students compare their answers. - Compare answers.
7. Asks for answers as a class. - Respond.

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 4: (2 mins) - Look at the pictures & talk to the
picture and talk to the group. Grammar group.
Tells them not to write.
2. Students compare their answers. - Compare answers.
3. Asks for answers as a class.
(none of the time=never; some - Respond.
of the time=sometimes; all of the
time=always)

1. Asks students to look at picture. Activity 5: (10 mins) - Look at the picture.
Says where is Bopha? Where is Listening (model of the speaking
Sreymao? activity)
2. Tells students they are going to
listen and find out if Sreymao is
a good student.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
5. Tells students to compare their
answers.
6. Asks for the answer as a class. - Respond.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 6: (10 mins) - Listen carefully.
going to interview each other, Speaking
just like Bopha did with
Sreymao. - Listen carefully and raise
2. Puts students into partners. questions if they have
3. Tells students to keep a score as any.
their partners answer the
questions. Points to the scores
in the book.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Have students interview
each other.
6. Have students add up each
other‟s scores.
7. Have students read each other
the results at the back of the
book.
8. Make sure any students who got
You are lazy understand that the
quiz is funny and it doesn‟t
really mean that they are lazy.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 73

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 74
 Step IV:
1. Asks the students what their Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Respond.
partners got in the quiz.
2. Asks students why.
3. Make sure students see this as
funny and do not feel bad
about the results.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about how Homework: - Listen and take note of the
to be a good person/citizen. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 5 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 75

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 5: I study English!
- Lesson C: Study habits – Is that right?
- Pages: 36-37
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your study habits and how often you do them.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits and how
often they do them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Writes true and false on the Step II: - Look at the board.
board. Warmer/Review (5 mins)
2. Asks students if they know what Warmer/Lead in - Guess.
the words mean. (if they don‟t
know, gives extra clues! Adds
truth/lie; right/wrong/ and tick &
cross).
3. Asks What do students lie - Respond.
about?
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Compare ideas as a class. - Compare ideas.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 76

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: Study habits – Is that - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. right or wrong?
- What is the title about?

1. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (3 mins) - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to look at the Students guess questions if they have
picture of Mom. Asks Who she any.
is.
- Asks Does she like her job?
- Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 1 min.
- Students write their guesses in - Compare guesses.
their notebooks.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 1: (5 mins)

going to listen and check their Listen and check - Listen carefully.
guesses.
2. Tells students to compare - Compare answers.
answers with their pairs.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.
Activity 2: (10 mins)
1. Gives instructions: Students listen for the answers - Listen carefully.
- Tells students to write the letters - Listen carefully and raise
a-f in their notebooks. questions if they have
- Checks that students know the any.
difference between a tick and
a cross.
- Tells students to read the
questions with their partners and - Read the questions.
see if they can remember/guess
the answers. Tells students to put
a tick for “yes, that‟s right”, and
a cross for “No, that‟s not right”.
- Tells students they are going to
listen and check and the answers - Listen & check.
in their notebooks.
- Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
- Students compare their answers
with their group/partner. - Compare answers.
Activity 3: (5 mins)
1. Tells students Miss Mom played Students listen for the answers
a trick and said one thing that is - Listen carefully.
false!
2. Asks students to look at the
tape, can they guess the thing
that is false?
3. Model the activity. Writes: My
name is Mom. Asks True or
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 77
 False? Students: True.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 78

4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with partner.
6. Asks students the answers as a - Respond.
class.
7. Asks students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (2 mins) - Listen carefully.

picture of Dara, Bopha and True/False
Sophal.
2. Asks them who they think
says the most false things.
3. Gets some ideas from students
but do not say who is right and
wrong.
4. Tells students that they are - Check answers.
going to check their guesses.
5. Look at Dara‟s list together I
always do my homework. asks
students if this is true or false.
Students: false!
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 5 mins.
7. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers.
8. Asks answers from the class. - Respond.

1. Write one thing that is true Activity 5: (10 mins) - Listen carefully.
about you and one thing that is a Writing
lie about you. - Write 3 sentences that are true
2. Tells students they are going and 2 sentences that are lies.
to write 3 sentences that are
true about them and 2
sentences which are lies about
them.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Activity 6: (7 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that you are Speaking
going to find out who is a good
liar in their group. - Work in groups of 4.
2. Puts students in groups of 4. - Take turns to read.
3. Tells students to take it in turns
to read their sentences.
4. Asks instructions checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - The others guess.
5. The rest of the group guesses.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 79
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 80
 Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the “can Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Look at the can do statements.
do” statements.
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about my studies. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say how often I do things.
about the can do statements. - Show about their feeling.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about how Homework: - Listen and take note of the
they study maths. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 6 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 81

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 6: Talking with teachers
- Lesson A: Talking with teacher – Can we have a party?
- Pages: 38-39
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Asking permission and making simple requests.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for permission and make simple
requests through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Tells students that they will hear Step II: - Listen carefully.
sentence. Can they be the first to Warmer/Review (7 mins)
guess if they are true or false? Warmer:
2. Rules: Play “Active true or false” - Listen carefully and raise
- Students are not allowed to talk. questions if they have
- If they think the answer is true any.
clap their hands.
- If they think it is false, students
stomp their feet.
3. Says a few sentences to students
and see who does the action
correctly. (e.g. There is a table in
the classroom. Students: Clap!
Clap! There is a kangaroo in the
classroom. Students: stomp!
Stomp!).

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 82

4. Have some students “be the - Whole class plays the game.
teacher” and ask the questions of
the class.

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: Talking with teachers – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Can we have a party?
- What is the title about?

1. Shows students the photo in the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the photo.
book. Lead in
2. Asks: What are the people - Respond.
doing?

1. Shows a picture of Linda, Activity 2: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

Bopha‟s friend. Students guess
2. Tells students to guess where she - Guess.
is from.
3. Tells students to talk with their - Talk and share ideas
partners and share ideas. with partners.
4. Then shows a picture of Linda
and UK. If there is a map in the - Look at the photo/map.
classroom, use the map to show
where Linda is from.

1. Says: Bopha wants to have a Activity 3: (5 mins) - Guess & respond.

party at school? Can she have a Students listen for the big idea
party at school?
2. Tells students to close the books. - Close the books.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions
4. Tells student to listen and check. - Listen & check.

1. Tells students to listen and put a Activity 4: (2 mins) - Listen carefully.

tick or a cross next to the Students listen for the answers
sentences
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mis.
3. Students listen and check. - Listen & check.
4. Asks and answers questions as a - Asks & answer the questions.
class.
Activity 4: (5 mins)
1. Tells students to listen & repeat. Students listen & repeat - Listen & repeat.

1. Gives instructions: Activity 5: (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to work in Guessing game questions if they have
groups of 3. any.
- Students take it in turns to make
requests using the pictures as
prompts. The other students have
to guess which picture the
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 83
 speaker is talking about.
- Asks instruction checking - Work in groups of 3.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Tells students to ask the teacher Activity 6: (4 mins) - Listen carefully.

things they want to do at school, Speaking
using “May I …” “Can I …”
2. Asks some students speak on - Start speaking.
behalf of other students, using
“May we…?” “Can she…?”

1. Gives instructions: Activity 7: (9 mins) - Listen carefully.

- Puts students into group of 5/6. Roleplay - Listen carefully and raise
- Tells one student in each questions if they have
group they are Mr. Sovann. any.
- Students in groups take it in
turns to ask Mr. Sovann using
„Can I, May I, Can he, May we‟.
- Tells students to make silly
requests. (e.g. can we study in
your office? Can we camp at
school? Can my dog study
with me?
- Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit - Start the roleplay.
of 7 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students what they Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) - Listen carefully.
asked Mr. Sovann.
2. Listens to students answer. - Respond.
(Pronunciation )

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about your Homework: - Listen and take note of the
Teacher of English. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 6 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 84

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 6: Talking with teachers
- Lesson B: Talking with teacher – Water festival fun
- Pages: 40-41
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Asking permission and making simple requests.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for permission and make simple
requests through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Rules: Step II: - Listen carefully.

- Students are not allowed to talk. Warmer/Review (7 mins)
- If they think the answers is true, Warmer:
students meow like a cat. Play “Active true or false” - Listen carefully and raise
- If it is false, students bark like a questions if they have
dog. any.
2. Says a few sentences and see
who does the action correctly.
3. Have some students “be the
teacher” and asks questions of
the class.
4. Have students come and take it
in turns to be the teacher. - Whole class plays the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 85

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (43 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: Talking with teachers – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Water festival fun
- What is the title about?

1. Shows some water festival Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the photo.

photos from activity 1. Lead in
2. Asks: What can you see? What - Respond.
are they doing?
3. Students guess which festival it - Guess in pairs.
is in pairs.
4. Asks some students to tell the - Tell their guesses.
class what their guesses are.

1. Students match the words with Activity 2: (5 mins) - Match the words with
the photos. New words the photos.
2. Students listen and repeat. - Listen & repeat.

1. Students read quickly to Activity 3: (3 mins) - Read quickly.

answer this question. Who is Students read for the big idea
Bopha going out with? (Dara,
Sophal and Avorng)
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Students compare with their - Compare answers.
partner/group.
4. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer as a class.

1. Tells students to name the Activity 4: (5 mins) - Name the characters.

characters that said the Students read for the answers
sentences.
2. Students write their answers in - Write in notebooks.
their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Students compare with - Compare answers.
partner/group.
5. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer as a class.

1. Tells students to pretend that Activity 5: (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
they are going to go to water Writing questions if they have
festival. Tells students to talk to any.
their partner/group about what
they want to see at Water
Festival.
2. Tells students that they are going
to make a list of sentences for - Listen carefully.
their mums. Tells students to add
their own ideas to their lists.
3. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 86
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 87
 questions and give a time limit
of 8 mins.

1. Students practice asking Activity 6: (5 mins) - Practice asking requests.

requests with their partners. Roleplay
2. Students use their ideas from - Use ideas from activity 5.
activity 5.

1. Puts students in group of 4/5. Activity 7: (10 mins) - Work in group of 4/5.
2. Students take turns to make Guessing game - Take turns to make sentences.
sentences using the pictures as
prompts.
3. Other students in the group - Others guess.
guess which picture the
speaker is talking about.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to talk about their Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Talk about group work activity.
group work. Asks for some
sentences they used to play the
game.
2. Are students confident about - Respond.
using the language? How is their
pronunciation?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
Water Festival. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 6 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 88

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 2: Good students
- Unit 6: Talking with teachers
- Lesson C: Talking with teacher – Can I do everything?
- Pages: 42-43
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Asking permission and making simple requests.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for permission and make simple
requests through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Put students into groups of 4/5. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
Asks students what their team Warmer: questions if they have
name is. Play “I hear with my little ear” any.
- The teacher says „I hear with
my little ear‟ something
beginning with /s/ (sound).
- In groups students think of a
word that begin with /s/.
- The first group to yell out
something beginning with /s/
gets a point for their team.
- Continue with a different letter /
sound. - Whole class plays the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 89

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (40 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: Talking with teachers – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Can I do everything?
- What is the title about?

1. Asks students what they think Activity 1: (5 mins) - Answer.

the characters are asking. Lead in
2. Lets them guess and talk to their - Talk to partners.
partners. Gives a time limit of 1
min.
3. Students listen and tick. - Listen & tick.

1. Tells students to write what the Activity 2: (10 mins) - Write what the characters said.
characters said using the picture Writing
prompts.
2. Tells students to write the - Write the responses for the
responses for the requests. requests.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Gives a time limit of 8
mins.
1. Tells students to work in pairs. Activity 3: (15 mins) - Work in pairs.
2. First, lets each students write Writing and speaking - Prepare any ideas in notebooks.
any more ideas they have in their
notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
4. Tells students to ask and - Ask & answer the questions.
answer the questions using the
pictures as prompts and their
own ideas.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Activity 4: (10 mins) - Look at activity 4.
1. Points to activity 4. Speaking - Look at the photos.
2. Shows students the 2 photos. - Work with a different partner.
3. Tells students to work with a
different partner from the one in
activity 3. - Ask & answer questions.
4. In pairs, students ask and
answer questions. - Put a tick on what they can /
5. Students put a tick on what they may do.
can / may do, based on their
classmate‟s response.
1. Asks students to look at the Step IV: - Look at the can do statements.
„can do‟ statements. Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can use „May I, May we‟ when - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel asking questions.
about the can do statements. I can use „Can I, Can we‟ - Show their feelings.
when asking questions.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 90

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 91
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they can do to help their homework.
parents.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 7 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 92

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 7: Getting ready for school
- Lesson A: Getting ready for school – The things we do for school
- Pages: 44-45
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your daily routines and things that you do in preparation for school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines and what
they prepare for school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Writes ordinal numbers first- Warmer/Review (10 mins)
tenth on small pieces of paper Warmer:
before class. Play “Line Up!”
- Puts students in groups of 10. - Listen carefully and raise
- Tells students they are going to questions if they have
play a game called „Line Up!‟. any.
Students put themselves in a line
from first to tenth. Tells students
that they should not read each
other‟s pieces of paper. They
should say what is written there
(Do not show the paper!)
- Asks instruction checking
questions.
- Calls each group in front of the

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 93

 class near the whiteboard.
- Hands each student a piece of
paper - Whole class plays the game.
- The team that gets in line in the
correct order the fastest is the
winner!

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (40 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: Getting ready for school - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. – The things we do for school
- What is the title about?

1. Tells students to match the Activity 1: (8 mins) - Match the pictures with words.
pictures words with their New words
partner/group.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Students compare with their - Compare answers.
partner/group.
4. Students listen, check and - Listen, check and repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students to work with their Activity 1: (5 mins) - Work in groups/in pairs. N
groups or in pairs. Tells students Lead in
to talk about what they do every
day.
2. Asks: Which picture do you do - Answers the questions.
every day? Which picture do
you do sometimes? What do you
do every day that is not in the
picture?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students they are going Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
to listen to Bopha and Dara Students listen for the big idea questions if they have
and decide which of the two any.
characters they are most like
(similar to).
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students talk to their
group/partner and say why they - Talk to their group/partner.
chose Bopha or Dara.
4. Come together as a class. Take a
vote! (put your hand up if - Take a vote!
you‟re like Dara!)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 94

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 95
1. Students listen again and tick. Activity 3: (10 mins) - Listen & tick.
2. Students listen and repeat. Students listen for the answers - Listen & repeat.

1. Puts students into small groups. Activity 4: (7 mins) - Work in groups.

2. Tells students to talk about what Speaking - Talk about what they do every
they do every day in their small day.
groups.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. In groups, students guess what Activity 5: (7 mins) - Guess what Avorn does every
Avorng does every day. Speaking day.
2. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell the Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) - Tell the class what they guessed.
class their guesses.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
daily routines. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 7 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 96

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 7: Getting ready for school
- Lesson B: Getting ready for school – A cold cool school
- Pages: 46-47
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your daily routines and things that you do in preparation for school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines and
what they prepare for school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts students into groups of 4/5. Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Says: pencil, pencil, pencil, Warmer: questions if they have
pencil, pen, pencil. Game! Which time? any.
- Asks: which is different? Is the
first different? Is the second
different? Is the fourth
different?
- Tells students to listen and say - Whole class plays the game.
which time was different.
Encourage them to use ordinal
numbers.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 97

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (45 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: Getting ready for school – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. A cold cool school
- What is the title about?

1. Shows photos of Canada. Lets Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the photos.

students guess what country Lead in
will learn about today.
2. Gives students hints as - Guess.
needed (e.g. This country
starts with letter C. It‟s
usually cold). - Talk about Canada.
3. Tells students to talk about what
they know about this country.
Activity 2: (7 mins) - Respond.
1. Asks students what they do Students read for the big idea
every day? - Read the text quickly.
2. Tells students to read the text
quickly to find out. - Respond.
3. Asks: Do you do the same things
as Bonny? Do you do anything
different?
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Compare answers.
5. Students compare their answers
with their partner/group.
Activity 3: (7 mins) - Read again & complete.
1. Tells students to read again and Students read for the answers
complete the table in their
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare their answers
with their partner/group. - Ask & answer questions.
4. Asks and answers questions as a
class.
Activity 4: (14 mins) - Compare their daily routines
1. Tells students that they are Writing with Bonny‟s.
going to compare their daily
routines with Bonny‟s. - Complete their own tables.
2. Tells students to complete their
own tables.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 10 mins.
Activity 5: (10 mins) - Work in groups of 5/6.
1. Puts students into groups of 5/6. Guessing game - Play a guessing game.
2. Students play a guessing game
in pairs or groups. - Take turns to say the times.
3. Tells students to take turns to
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 98
 say the times they‟ve written
in

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 99

 their notebooks.
4. Other students guess she/he does - Others guess.
at that time. Students get 1 point
for each correct guess.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell the Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins) - Tell the class.
class about their timetables.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
timetables for study at home. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 7 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 100

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 7: Getting ready for school
- Lesson C: Getting ready for school – Great days
- Pages: 48-49
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your daily routines and things that you do in preparation for school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their daily routines and
what they prepare for school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.
-
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts students into 2 teams. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Chooses a strong student Warmer: questions if they have
from each team to be the Game! Charades any.
„actor‟.
- The actors take it in turns to
mime words/phrases that the
teacher tells them (e.g. sit down,
notebook, etc…)
- Their team must guess the word.
- Asks instruction checking - Whole class plays the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 101

 Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (34 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson C: Getting ready for school – - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Great days
- What is the title about?

1. Tells students to order the Activity 1: (7 mins) - Order the ordinal numbers.
ordinal numbers in exercise one. Review
Then they write the full forms in
their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. This is a counting game. Buzz! Stirrer (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

Students need to count up the
numbers quickly.
2. In groups, students take turns
counting up one number at a
time, but for any multiple of 4,
they say „buzz‟. (e.g. 1, 2, 3,
buzz…). Change to multiple of
3, 5…)
3. Asks instruction checking - Whole class plays the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students to listen to Bopha Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen to the tape.

and order the pictures using Students listen for the answers
ordinal numbers.

1. Tells students to write about Activity 3: (10 mins) - Write about Avorng.
Avorng. Writing
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
3. Students compare their writing - Compare writing.
with their partners.
4. Have some students read their - Read for the class.
work out for the class.

1. Tells students to stand up and Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
look at the teacher. Play Sok says! questions if they have
2. Says that you will let them to do any.
things but they should only do if
you say Sok says!
3. There are rules. If a student is
too slow to they are out. If
students do something, but you
didn‟t say Sok says, they are out.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 102
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 103
4. If they don‟t do something, but - Whole class plays the game.
you did say Sok says they are
out.

1. Asks students to look at the Step IV: - Look at the can do statements.
„can do‟ statements. Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel
about the can do statement. - Show the class their feelings.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Gets students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
day you like most and why. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 8 on page 206 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 104

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 8: Going to school
- Lesson A: Going to school – Do you know what he does?
- Pages: 50-51
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about how you and your friends get to school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they and their friends
get to school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (48 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson A: Going to school – Do you - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. know what he does?
- What is the title about?

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture & talk to
picture. Asks what they can Lead in/students guess their partners.
remember about Sophal and
Linda. Tells students to talk to
their partners for a minute.
2. Asks for some answers as a - Respond.
class.
3. Asks students why they think - Talk to their partners.
Sophal is talking to Linda. Tells
students to talk to their partner

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 105

 for a minute.
4. Asks for some answers as a - Respond.
class.

1. Students listen and check. Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen & Check.

2. Students compare. Students listen for the big idea - Compare answers.
3. Asks for some answers as a - Respond.
class. Possible answers: Sophal is flirting
with Linda. Sophal wants Linda to
think he is good/cool. Sophal wants
Linda to think that he is better than
Dara.

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 3: (5 mins) - Work in pairs.

partner. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students to try and - Guess what Sophal said.
remember/guess what Sophal
said. Gives a 3 mins limit.
3. Tells students to write 1-11in - Write 1-11 and write S=Sophal,
their notebooks and write S for D=Dara, L=Linda in
Sophal, D for Dara and L for notebooks.
Linda.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Students listen and compare.
6. Asks for answers as a class. - Listen & compare.
- Respond.
1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (3 mins)
grammar box. Grammar pronunciation presentation - Look at the grammar box.
2. Tells students that they are
going to read, listen and guess - Read, listen & guess.
what happens to the word brush
in the words.
3. Asks students to complete the
grammar rules by looking at - Complete the grammar rules.
the examples sentences.
4. Students compare.
- Compare.
1. Tells students that there are Activity 5: (5 mins)
3 different ways to say the Grammar pronunciation presentation - Listen carefully.
ending„s‟ noise in English.
2. Tells students to listen.
3. Tells students to listen again and - Listen.
repeat. - Listen again & repeat.
1. Tells students that you are Game! Pronunciation controlled
going to play a game to find out practice (7 mins) - Listen carefully.
who the best listeners are.
2. Tells students to close their Sleeps / showers / brushes / pens /
books, writes: S, Z, IZ on the notebooks / gets / watches / goes /
board. Drills the sounds. borrows / cleans / eggs / classmates /
3. Tells students to wave their kangaroos / libraries / bathrooms /
hands in the air if they hear a footballs / - Whole class plays the game.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 106
 /s/

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 107

 word, touch their nose if they
hear an /IZ/ word, and shake
their partners hand if they
hear a /Z/ words.
Activity 6: (5 mins)
1. Tells students to write a-k in Speaking – preparing to speak - Write a-k in notebooks.
their notebooks.
2. Tells students to look at the - Tick things they do and cross
pictures in their textbooks and things they don‟t do.
tick the things they do and cross
the things they do not do.
3. Gives a time limit of 3 mins.
Activity 7: (5 mins)
1. Tells students to tell their partner Speaking – free practice - Tells their partner about them.
about them using the pictures.

1. Tells students to draw 2 columns Activity 8: (10 mins) - Listen carefully.

down the side of the page next to Speaking – free practice
the letters. - Draw 2 columns.
2. Tells students they will have 5
mins to find one person that does
and one person that doesn‟t for
each of the activities. They do
not have to write sentences, just
names.
3. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.
4. Students talk to their partners - Talk to partners using and + but.
using and + but.

1. Asks individual students about Step IV: - Respond.

what they found during the Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)
race. - Practice with pronunciations.
2. Listens for /S/ /Z/ /IZ/ and
congratulates students who do
this correctly.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write 5 Homework: (Optional ) - Listen and take note of the
sentences. Use and + but. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders:
list for unit 8 on page 206 in the - Listen and take note.
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 108

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 8: Going to school
- Lesson B: Going to school – Liar Liar
- Pages: 52-53
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about how you and your friends get to school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they and their friends
get to school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step III:
Introducing New Lesson (48 mins)
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Lesson B: Going to school – Liar - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Liar
- What is the title about?

1. Asks students how they get to Activity 1: (5 mins) - Respond.

school. Lead in
2. Tells students to open their - Open the book, but to cover the
book, but to cover the text. text.
3. Tells students to look at the
cartoon. Asks how does Dara get - Look at the cartoon and answer.
to school?
4. Tells students to work with their - Work with partner to describe
partner and describe but not read the cartoon.
the text.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 109

5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
6. Com back together as a class. - Share ideas.
Gets 2 or 3 ideas from students.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully to respond to the
going to read and listen. They Students read/listen for the big idea question: Is Dara a liar?
are reading to see if what Dara
says and what is in the cartoon is
the same or different. Is Dara a
liar?
2. Tells students to read along with
their finger. This helps students
with dyslexia and also helps
you check no one is lost.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Fingers Ready?
Plays the recording. - Listen & read along with fingers.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Compare answer.
5. Tells students to compare their
answer with their - Check answer.
group/partner.
6. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 3: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
Students read for the answers
1. Writes Does he get up early? On - Listen carefully and to
the board. answer about what Dara says.
2. Tells students that they are
going to answer questions about - Respond.
what Dara says and Not the
cartoon.
3. Asks Does Dara say he gets up
early? Students answer Yes.
Have students point to the part
of text where they found the
answer.
4. Asks instruction checking - Complete.
questions and gives a time limit - Compare answers.
of 5 mins. - Check answers.
5. Students complete.
6. Students compare with their
group/partner. Activity 4: (2 mins) - Respond.
7. Checks answers as a class. Post task
- Discuss with partner.
1. Asks students if they lie? What
about? - Respond.
2. Students discuss with their
partner.
3. Asks for some answers as a
class. (This is supposed to be
funny and silly!)
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 110
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 111
1. Writes: use ‘do’ with ‘I, you, Activity 5: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
we, they’. Grammar
2. Points to the example box. Asks - Respond.
Truth or Lie? Students: Truth.
3. Draw a tick next to Use do with - Draw a tick.
I you we they.
4. Tells students to write numbers - Tick & cross in notebook.
1-12 in their notebooks and tick
for truths cross for lies.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
6. Students compare. - Compare.
7. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer questions.
class.

1. Puts students into groups of 4. Activity 6 and 7: (10 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
Asks them to decide on one Writing
student to be the writer.
2. Tells students to look at the - Look at the picture.
picture. Tells students that
Sophal wants to find out more
about Bopha‟s friend Linda.
3. Says What does Sophal ask - Respond.
Bopha? Students: Does she
like birds?
4. Asks students what other - Respond.
questions Sophal might like to
ask a new classmate.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Models the activity with one of Activity 8: (6 mins) - One models with the teacher.
the students. Asks them to think Speaking
of a student but not to tell you
(teacher) who it is.
2. Asks: Is it a girl? Does she like - Respond.
English? Etc. After 4-5
questions, guess who you think
the student is.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Have students play the game till - Play the game.
2 mins before the end of the
lesson.

1. Asks a few students what they Step IV: - Respond.

found out about their “guess Assessment and Wrap-up (2 mins)
who” partner.
2. Listens for correct use of - Use of auxiliary verbs & 3rd
auxiliary verbs 3rd person person singular.
singular.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 112
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 113
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write what they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
tell lies to their parents. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders:
list for unit 8 on page 206 in the - Listen and take note.
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 114

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 8: Going to school
- Lesson C: Going to school – Lazy boy
- Pages: 54-55
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about how you and your friends get to school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they and their friends
get to school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts the class into 2 teams Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Right side Vs left side.
(right side vs left side) Warmer: Game! Spelling Badminton
- Tells students that they have 30
seconds to decide on a team
name.
- Asks students if they can play
badminton. Asks who is the best
at badminton?
- Tells students that they are - Listen carefully and raise
going to play spelling questions if they have
badminton. Tells students that any.
they have one minute to look at
the word list from the unit. At
the end of a minute, claps your
hand. Books closed!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 115

- Asks one “player” from each
team to come to the in front of
the room.
- Gives them a racket each one.
(There is no racket! That‟s
funny!)
- Shows the class how to play.
Says a word. (e.g. UGLY).
Stands where the student 1 is.
Says U. Then stands where the
student 2 is. Says G. Then stands
where the student 1 is. Says L.
Then stands where the student 2
is. Says I. asks: Is that right?
Students: No!
- Rules: if students don‟t use the - Whole class plays the game.
“racket”, they die and the other
team gets a point. If a student
takes too long, the ball hits the
ground and they die. If a student
says the last letter of the word
correctly, their team gets a point.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (32 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: Going to school – Lazy
- What is the title about? boy

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture.

picture. What can they see? Students guess
2. Asks students What is - Respond.
happening?
3. Asks students why? - Respond.
4. Students compare with their
partner for a minute.
5. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas
(but do not say who is right or
wrong).

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses. - Listen.
2. Students listen. - Compare.
3. Students compare. - Check answers.
4. Check answers as a class.
Activity 3: (5 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. - Guess/remember.
2. Tells students to try and
remember/guess if it was Dara
did A or B. Gives a 2 mins limit. - Write 1-3 in notebook.
3. Tells students to write 1-3 in
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 116
 their notebooks. Then tells them

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 117

 to listen and write A or B.
4. Students listen. - Listen.
5. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Asks for answers as a class. - Respond.

1. Writes He to school. He Activity 4: (7 mins) - Look at the board.

doesn‟t . On the board. Controlled grammar practice
2. Asks students to tell you - Respond.
what goes in the blanks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Students complete and compare. - Complete & compare.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Tells students to take out a Activity 5: (7 mins) - Prepare a piece of paper.

scrap piece of paper (they will Game!
give it to you after, so it cannot
be in their notebooks).
2. Tells students to write 5 more - Write 10 more sentences.
“do/don‟ts” (10 sentences).
Make sure students know to
keep their paper secret.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. At the end of the time, clap your - Put their pens down.
hands and tells students to put
down their pens.

1. Collects all the student‟s Activity 6 and 7: (6 mins) - Give the paper to the teacher.
papers together. Game!
2. Tells students to come and - Come and choose a new paper
choose a new paper and they to find out who is the owner of
have to keep the paper secret. the paper.
Students need to ask all the
students questions to try and find
the owner of the paper BUT that
they need to keep asking
questions even when they think
they have found the owner of the
paper!
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. At the end of the 5 mins, clap - Sit down.
your hands and tells students to
sit down.
5. Asks some students who they - Respond.
think is on their paper.
6. Tells students to go and give - Go & give the paper to its
the paper back to its owner. owner.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 118
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 119
1. Asks students to look at the Step IV: - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can say what other people do. - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say what other people
about the can do statements. don‟t do. - Show the class the feelings.
I can ask questions.
I can say what I don‟t do.
I can introduce my friends.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write what they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
do/don‟t do to their parents. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders:
list for unit 9 on page 207 in the - Listen and take note.
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 120

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 9: After school
- Lesson A: After school – My after school favourite
- Pages: 56-57
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about fun activities you do after school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce fun activities that they do after
school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Tells students that they have a Warmer: Magic Finger – Colour questions if they have
magic finger. Shows them your Race any.
magic finger. Asks students to
hold up their magic fingers.
- Tells students that you will say
a colour and they have to touch
something that colour with
magic finger.
- Rules: if you touch the wrong
colour, you are out. If you are
the last one to touch a colour,
you are out.
- Says a colour (e.g. green)
students touch something that is

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 121

 green with their “magic finger”
(e.g. a bag or a pen).
- Tells students that they are
touching the wrong colour to sit
down.
- Repeat until there is a winner. - Whole class plays the game.
Everyone claps!

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: After school – My after
- What is the title about? school favourite

1. Gives instructions: Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

- Puts students into groups of 4. Lead in - Work in groups of 4.
- Tells students to look at the - Look at the pictures for new
pictures for the new words. words.
- Tells students what you do after - Listen to the teacher says.
school. Points to the pictures
and says I do this and this I
sometimes do that. I never do
that…
- Tells students to talk to their - Talk to their partner.
group and tell them what they
do.
- Asks instruction checking
questions.

1. Students work with their partner. Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with partner.
2. Tells students to write numbers New words - Write numbers 1-10 in
1-10 in their notebooks. notebooks.
3. Students match the letters to the - Match the letters to the
numbers/pictures. numbers/pictures.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Students look at the pictures and - Listen & check.
listen and check.
6. Students listen and repeat. - Listen & repeat.

1. Asks students to look at the Students guess: (2 mins) - Look at the pictures.
pictures. Says: What do you do
after school?
2. Tells students to talk to their - Talk to their friends.
friends and guess for a minute.
3. Come back together as a class - Share ideas.
and get some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 3: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses. - Listen to the tape.
2. Students listen. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare. - Check answers.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 122
4. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 123

1. Students work with a partner. Activity 4: (10 mins) - Work with partner.
2. Students try and Students listen for the answers - Remember/guess.
remember/guess the answers to
the questions. Do the first
together as a class. - Write 1-9 in notebooks.
3. Students to write 1-9 in their
notebooks. - Listen & write T for Tevy P
4. Students listen and write T for for Pich K for Kosal R for
Tevy P for Pich K for Kosal and Rith.
R for Rith.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.
6. Students listen. - Listen.
7. Students compare their answers - Compare answers with partners.
with their partners. - Compare answers as a class.
8. Compare answers as a class.
Activity 5: (3 mins)
1. Puts students into partners. If Preparing for speaking - Work in pairs.
you can, change people who
usually work together to make it
more fun.
2. Asks students how well they - Respond.
know their partner.
3. Tells students that they are going - Make guesses about their
to make guesses about what their partners.
partners do after school.
4. Tells students that they are not - Not yet to ask their partners.
allowed to ask their partner
yet.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. Activity 6: (10 mins)
Speaking - Talk to partner to check
1. Tells students to talk to their their guesses.
partner and check their guesses. - Check scores. Agree or not?
2. When both students have
finished, tells them to check
their scores. Do they agree?
Step IV:
1. Talks about the results as a class. Assessment and Wrap-up (3 mins) - Talk about their results.
Asks what students got right and
wrong. Encourages them to use
new words. Are they confident?
How is their pronunciation?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 124

 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
favourite fun activities they homework.
do most after school.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 9 on page 207 in the
student‟s book. - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 125

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 126

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 9: After school
- Lesson B: After school – How often?
- Pages: 58-59
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about fun activities you do after school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce fun activities that they do after
school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1.Gives instructions: Step II:

- Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Puts class into 4 groups. Warmer: The acting game questions if they have
- Tells students to decide on a any.
team name.
- Writes the team names on the
board.
- Have one student from each
group go to the board and face
the class so they cannot see the
board.
- Writes an after school activity
from the last lesson. Tells the
students facing the rest of the
class guess the word and walk
around the room. If no one has

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 127

 guessed it after a minute, tells
them to look at the board.
- Rules: the people at the board
can talk. The people trying to act
and show the word are not
allowed to talk. First team to
guess gets a point.
- People who cheat lose a point.
- Play the game using the words - Whole class plays the game.
from the unit (do homework,
study, work, go to school, watch
TV…)

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: After school – How
- What is the title about? often?

1. Asks: Are you busy after school? Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
2. Tells students that they will do a Students read and listen for the big
quiz to find out. idea
3. Tells students to read and listen
and think about their answers.
4. Tells students to read along with
their finger. This helps them
with dyslexia and also helps
you check no one is lost.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the recording.
6. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers.

1. Tells students to write numbers Activity 2: (10 mins) - Write numbers 1-6.
1-6 in their notebooks. Students read for the answers
2. Students write their answers as - Full word writings.
full words.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Students complete. - Complete.
5. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with their partner.
6. Students add their scores and
look at the scores to see if they
are lazy.

1. Draws the table on the board. Activity 3: (5 mins) - Look at the board.
2. Writes Never next to 100% Grammar
3. Says Is that right? Students: No!
4. Writes Never next to 30%
5. Says Is that right? Students: No!
6. Writes Never next to 0%
7. Says Is that right? Students: Yes!
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 128
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 129
8. Tells students to complete the - Complete the table.
table in their notebooks.

1. Tells students that they are going Activity 4: (10 mins) - Listen carefully.
to write their own quiz. Writing
2. Tells students to brainstorm - Brainstorm ideas.
ideas with their partners. (e.g.
Are you a good student? Are you
boring? Are you lazy? Etc.)
3. Tells students to copy the table - Copy the table into notebooks.
into their notebooks and to write
their quiz. Encourages
creativity!
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 10 mins.

1. Tells students to stand up. Activity 5: (10 mins) - Stand up.

2. They will ask 4 people their Speaking - Ask 2 girls & 2 boys
quiz. They should ask 2 girls and the questions.
2 boys. They should take their
quiz with them so that they can
remember the questions, but they
have to ask the questions.
3. Gives a time limit of 7 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students what they got Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Respond.
in their friends quizzes. Why?
2. Listens to - Pronounce.
student‟s
pronunciation.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to make the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
sentences with always, usually, homework.
sometimes, hardly ever and
never.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 9 on page 207 in the
student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 130

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 3: A school day
- Unit 9: After school
- Lesson C: After school – How many people can you find after school?
- Pages: 60-61
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about fun activities you do after school.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce fun activities that they do after
school through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Tells students the rules of the Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
game (They are not allowed to Warmer: Pictionary! questions if they have
speak. They have one minute to any.
have their partner guess what
they are drawing).
- Divides the class into 2 teams
for them to complete to guess.
- Draws one of the words from
Wordlist on the board (e.g.
swimming).
- Gives a point to the
right guessing team.
- Tells students to break into
groups of 4. Tells students to
choose a partner in their

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 131

 group.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 132

- Asks instruction checking - Whole class plays the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 7.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (37 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: After school – how many
- What is the title about? people can you find after school?

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the pictures & answer.
pictures. What can they see? Students guess
2. Tells students to guess what - Guess.
order the pictures go in.
3. Students compare with their - Compare answers.
partner for a minute.
4. Gets some different ideas from - Share ideas.
the class.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
going to listen and check their Students read and listen to the model questions if they have
guesses but not to write. any.
2. Tells students to read along with
their finger. This helps them
with dyslexia and also helps you
check no one is lost.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the recording.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Listen & read.
5. Tells students to write 1-6 in
their notebooks and to write - Write numbers 1-6.
letters in order for
Chamroen‟s day.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
7. Students compare their answers.
8. Checks answers as a class. - Compare answers.
- Check answers.
1. Tells students to talk to their Activity 3: (10 mins)
partners and tells them 4 things Writing - Listen carefully & talk about 4
they do after school. Use the things they do after school.
pictures in activity 3 if they
don‟t have ideas.
2. Tells students to write about
what they do after school. Use - Write about what they do
the model from Chamroeun and after school.
first, second, then finally etc.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Puts students in groups of 4.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 133

5. Asks students to read their - Read their writing to partner.
writing to their group.

1. Tells students to get Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

their pointing fingers Students listen to the model
ready.
2. Says I never go on facebook and
point at the table next to
facebook where it says 0%.
Repeats with other examples
until students get ideas. - Listen & point to the table.
3. Tells students that they are
going to listen to Dara and
Bopha talking and to point to the
table. Activity 5: (10 mins) - Copy the table into notebook.
Game! (similar to find someone
1. Tells students to copy the table who)
into their notebook. They have 2 - Listen carefully.
mins. Go!
2. Tells students they are going
to play a game and that they
need to talk to as many - Play the game.
different people as they can.
3. Rules: if the teacher hears
Khmer, you lose a point. You
get one point for each box you
fill in. You get 10 points if you
have boys and girls. You get an
extra point for every different
name.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Assessment and Wrap-up (5 mins) - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. I can talk about what I do after
2. Compare with a partner. school. - Compare statements.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say how often I do things.
about the can do statements. I can ask how often my friends do - Show the class the feelings.
things.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students write why they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
do things after school. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 10 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 134
...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 135

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 10: My family
- Lesson A: My family – Family tree
- Pages: 62-63
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your family and their relative ages.
~ Describing and drawing your own family tree.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their family and their relative
ages & describe and draw their family tree through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Draws hangman picture on the Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
board. Warmer: Play Hangman! questions if they have
- Tells students you are thinking any.
of a word. Draws the same
numbers of lines as letters in the
word you want them to guess
(e.g. egg = ) on the
board.
- Asks a few students to guess one
letter at a time.
- If students say a letter right,
writes it on the board.
- If wrong letters are given, draws
the hanging man one body part
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 136
 at a time (head, neck, arm, etc.)
- Game continues until the word is
guessed (win!) or all the parts of
the hangman are drawn (lose!).
- Puts students in groups of 4/5.
- Students take it in turns to let - Whole class plays the game.
other students guess the words
they are thinking.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: My family – Family tree
- What is the title about?

1. Students match the pictures with Activity 1: (8 mins) - Match the pictures with the
the words. New words words.
2. Students write the words in their - Writes the words in notebooks.
notebooks.
3. Students point to the pictures as - Listen & check.
they listen and check their
answers. - Listen & repeat.
4. Students listen and repeat.

1. Tells students use the words to Activity 2: (6 mins) - Use the words to tell partner
tell their partner about Speaking about themselves.
themselves.

1. Shows Dara‟s family photo. Activity 3: (5 mins) - Look at Dara‟s family photo.
2. Students guess who the people Students listen for the big idea - Guess who the people are in the
are in the photo. They tell their photo.
partners. Students listen and
point to the people in the photo
as they hear them.

1. Tells students to listen again and Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

answer the questions in their Students listen for the answers
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students listen and check. - Listen & check.
4. Students compare with their - Compare with partner.
group/partner.
5. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer questions.
class.
5. Students compare with their
partner for a minute.
6. Gets some different ideas from
the class.

1. Tells students that the pictures Activity 5: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

are of Dara‟s family. Students match the words with the
2. Point to the first picture. Says photos - Look at the picture & answer.
Who is this? Students:
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 137
 Dara‟s

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 138

 brother! - Match the pictures.
3. Tells students to continue to
match the pictures.

1. Students draw their family trees. Activity 6: (11 mins) - Draw & talk about their family
Then in pairs, they talk about Speaking trees.
their family trees.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
family. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 10 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 139

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 10: My family
- Lesson B: My family – I‟m smarter than that
- Pages: 64-65
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your family and their relative ages.
~ Describing and drawing your own family tree.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their family and their relative
ages & describe and draw their family tree through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts students into groups of 4/5. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Gives a category (e.g. colours, Warmer: Play „Things in common‟ questions if they have
parts of the body, numbers, days any.
of the week, months of the year,
school item).
- Gives a time limit of 20-30
seconds.
- In groups, students write down
as many words as they can from
the given category within the
time limit.
- Stops the groups after 20-30
seconds.
- Award points: 1point for words
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 140
 written in the correct category. 5
points for words only one team
wrote.
- The team with the most number - Whole class plays the game.
of points at the end of the game
wins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: My family – I‟m
- What is the title about? smarter than that

1. Tells students to look at Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the photo of Avorng.

Avorng‟s photo. Students guess
2. Asks questions (e.g. how many - Answers questions.
sisters has he got?)

1. Tells students to read about Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

Avorng‟s family. Students read for the big idea
2. Asks them to read quickly and - Read quickly about
point to the people in Avorng‟s Avorng‟s family.
family photo as they read about
them.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare answers.
answers with their
partner/group. - Asks and answer.
5. Asks and answers questions as a
class.
Activity 3: (7 mins) - Read & answer.
1. Tells students to read the text Students read for the answers
and answer the questions in their
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare answers.
3. Tells students to compare
answers with partner/groups. - Ask & answer as a class.
4. Asks and answers as a class.
Activity 4: (5 mins) - Read & match.
1. Tells students to read the Grammar model
sentences and match them with
the photos.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Ask & answer as a class.
4. Asks and answers questions as a
class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 141

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 142
1. Students complete the exercises Activity 5: (5 mins) - Complete the exercises.
in the grammar box. Grammar box

1. In pairs, students take it in turns Activity 6: (9 mins) - Work in pairs to compare the 2
to compare the two pictures. Speaking A pictures.
They either agree or disagree.

1. Shows students some school Activity 7: (10 mins) - Look at some school items.
items (e.g. pens, pencils, Speaking B
notebooks, books, desks, chairs).
2. Tells students to compare the - Compare items in groups
items in their groups.
3. Gives rules (e.g. students must - Discuss for a final answer.
discuss their answers first in
groups. When the groups has a
final answer, the students should
raise their hands and be
acknowledged by the teacher. A
group representative will say the
sentence.)
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. In groups, students compare the - Compare items.
two items.

Step IV:
1. Reviews some of the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Review some of the sentences.
sentences as a class. up (2 mins)
2. Are students using articles? (The - Using of comparative adjectives.
pen is bigger than the marker
etc.)? Are students using than?
Are students confident using
comparative adjectives?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write and Homework: - Listen and take note of the
describe about their smart homework.
dog/cat. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 10 on page 207 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 143
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 144
 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 10: My family
- Lesson C: My family – I‟m taller than my sister
- Pages: 66-67
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your family and their relative ages.
~ Describing and drawing your own family tree.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their family and their relative
ages & describe and draw their family tree through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Recalls adjectives. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Allows students to call them out. Warmer: questions if they have
- Writes them on the board as they any.
call them out. Writes about 10
adjectives.
- Lets students call out 10 names
of their classmate. Writes them
on the board.
- Puts students into group of 4/5.
- Gives a time limit of 2 mins.
- In groups, students write as
many comparative sentences as
they can within the time limit.
- Feedback: allows students to call
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 145
 out their sentences. Gives points
for each correct sentence. Boards
some incorrect sentences. Asks
questions to help students
correct the sentences.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: My family – I‟m taller
- What is the title about? than my sister

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (7 mins) - Look at the broken words.
broken words. Asks: What Broken words
goes with bro? ter? Students:
No! asks: ler? Students: No!
asks: ther? Students: Yes!
2. Tells students to complete the - Complete the rest of the word
rest of the word halves in their halves.
notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with their group/partner.
5. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Writes 5 and 10 on the board. Activity 2: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
2. Tells students to look at the Crack the code - Look at the table.
table. Asks What letter is 5? H
3. Writes H on the board. Tells
students to look at the table
again. Asks What letter is 10? E
4. Writes E on the board.
5. Puts students into groups.
6. Tells them to use the given code - Use the codes to make
to make sentences. sentences.
7. Gives a time limit of 8 mins.
8. The first team to write the
sentences wins.

1. Students write about themselves Activity 3: (11 mins) - Write about themselves and one
and one member of their family Writing member.
in their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 10 mins.

1. Puts students into 2 big teams. Activity 4: (10 mins) - Works in groups.
2. Says a sentence (e.g. An Communicative task - Listen carefully.
elephant is big).
3. In teams students think of a - Think of a comparative sentence.
comparative sentence (A hippo
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 146
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 147
 is bigger than an elephant).
4. Teams decide if their sentences - Decide on the sentences.
are accurate.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
„can do‟ statements. up (2 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about my - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel family. I can draw my
about the can do statements. family tree. - Show about their feelings.
I can talk about two people or two
things.
I can describe myself and my
friends.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their sister. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 11 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 148

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 11: I‟m the coolest in my family
- Lesson A: I‟m the coolest in my family – I‟m the best
- Pages: 68-69
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about extended members of your family.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce & describe extended members
of their family through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts students into groups of 4/5. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Students in each group take turns Warmer: „Back writing‟ questions if they have
to write words on each other‟s any.
back, using their point fingers.
- The student then guesses the
word.
- If the student guesses the word
correctly, it‟s now his/her turn
to write on another student‟s
back.
- Tells students to open their - Whole class plays the game.
books. Then they choose words
learnt in previous units for this
activity.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 149

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: I‟m the coolest in my
- What is the title about? family – I‟m the best

1. Puts students into groups. Activity 1: (5 mins) - Work in groups.

2. Asks students to think about Lead in - Think about birthday parties.
birthday parties. Asks: What do
you do? (play the games, eat,
talk/chat with friends) what do
you see? (balloons, cake, food,
etc.)
3. Students complete the spider - Complete the diagram.
web diagram on birthdays in the
student‟s book.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students that it is Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

grandma‟s 80th birthday Students listen for the big idea
today! - Listen & tick.
2. Students listen and tick the
ones they hear on their spider
web diagrams.
Activity 3: (5 mins) - Listen & number the pictures.
1. Students listen again and number Students listen for the answers
the pictures. - Compare answers in pairs.
2. Students compare their answers
in pairs, then call on some
students for the answers. - Check answers.
3. Checks answers as a class.
Students listen and repeat (3 mins) - Listen & repeat.
1. Students point to the pictures as
they listen and repeat.
Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen again.
1. Tells students to listen again. Students listen for the answers - Write the answers in notebooks.
2. Tells students to write the
answers in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Activity 5 (7 mins) - Complete the exercises.
1. Students complete the exercises Grammar box
in the grammar box.
2. Ask instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Check answers.
3. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 6 (11 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
1. Lets students work in pairs. Post task – noughts and crosses questions if they have
2. One student uses (x). The other any.
student uses (O).
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 150
3. Students take it in turns to

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 151

 answer the questions in the
boxes.
4. When a student has correctly
answered in one box, that
student draw his / her symbol
(X) or (O) in the box.
5. When a student has answered
all questions vertically or
horizontally, he/she wins.
6. Stops students after 10mins.
7. Asks students some questions in - Play the game.
the game. Were there answers
correct?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
themselves as the best in family. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 11 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 152

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 11: I‟m the coolest in my family
- Lesson B: I‟m the coolest in my family – Small or big?
- Pages: 70-71
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about extended members of your family.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce & describe extended members
of their family through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts students into groups of 3/4. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Tells students they will ONLY Warmer: „Memory Spelling game‟ questions if they have
listen to the words you say. any.
- Students shouldn‟t write
anything at this point. If
necessary, have them keep their
notebooks and pens in their
bags.
- Says 5 words (e.g. brother, mum,
grandpa, pencil, notebook).
Students listen ONLY.
- Then, each group remembers the
words and writes down the - Whole class plays the game.
words on a piece of paper.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 153

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: I‟m the coolest in my
- What is the title about? family – Small or big?

1. Tells students to match the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Match the words with
words with the pictures. New words the pictures.
2. Students listen and repeat. - Listen & repeat.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Asks: How many people live in Activity 2: (5 mins) - Respond.

your family? Is your family big Lead in
or small?
2. Students tick the family - Tick family members.
members that live with them.
3. Students look at the photos of - Look at the photos of the 2
the two families. families.
4. Asks: which picture is a picture
of a small family? Which - Respond.
picture is a picture of a big
family?
Activity 3: (3 mins) - Read the text.
1. Tells students to read the text Students read for the big idea
quickly.
2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins. - Respond.
3. Asks: Which is Carol‟s
family picture? Which is
Phalla‟s family picture? Activity 4: (5 mins)
Students read for the answers - Read & answer.
1. Tells students to read again and Is Carol from Cambodia? (no)
answer the questions with yes or Is she sometimes sad? (yes)
no. Does she like Cartoon Network?(no)
2. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. Does Phalla live in a small house? - Check answers.
3. Check answers as a class. (no)
Does Phalla help his mum? (yes)
Is Phalla a fast swimmer? (yes)
Do you help your mum? ( )

Activity 5 (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise

1. Asks students about their family Writing and drawing questions if they have
trees from previous lessons. any.
2. If they have it with them, asks
them to include grandpa,
grandma, aunts, uncles and
cousins.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.
4. Shows to the class some of the - Show the class.
completed family trees. Activity 6 (7 mins)
1. Students answer questions about Writing - Answer questions.
their family in notebooks.
2. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 154
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 155
1. Puts students in pairs. Activity 7: (8 mins) - Work in pairs.
2. Tells students not to show their Speaking - Keep their answers secret.
answers to activity 6 with their
partners. They should keep their
answers secret.
3. Students ask and answer - Ask & answer.
questions about their families.
4. Stops students after 6 mins. - Tell what their guesses are.
5. Calls on some students to tell
you what their guesses are. Were
they correct?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
grandma/grandpa. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 11 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 156

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 11: I‟m the coolest in my family
- Lesson C: I‟m the coolest in my family – Family of monsters
- Pages: 72-73
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about extended members of your family.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce & describe extended members
of their family through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II:

- Puts students into groups of 4/5. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
- Writes 5 sentences on the board. Warmer: „Memory test‟ questions if they have
- As you write, make sure students any.
are not copying them on to their
notebooks.
- Gives students 1-2 mins to
memorize the sentences and
written on the board.
- Erases the board clean.
- Students in groups remember the
sentences and write them on a
piece of paper.
- Gives a time of 2-3 mins.
- The group that remembers the
most wins. - Whole class plays the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 157

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: I‟m the coolest in my
- What is the title about? family – family of monsters

1. Writes or draws a monster on the Activity 1: (8 mins) - Look at the board.

board. Read for the answers - Think & guess.
2. Asks students what they think it
is. Lets them guess, and then
tells them it‟s a monster.
3. Asks them what they know - Respond.
about monsters. Accepts all
answers.
4. Tells students they are going to - Read the text.
read about a family of monsters.
5. Students use the family tree
to answers yes/no questions.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 6 mins.
7. Checks answers as a class.

1. Students work in pairs. Activity 2: (15 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Student A turns to page 231. Listening and writing questions if they have
3. Student B turns to page 237. any.
4. Tells students not to look at
each other‟s texts. Their texts
are secret.
5. Pre-teach „Can you repeat that,
please? And „Can you spell
that, please?‟ gives examples of
this in class. Do not translate.
6. Student A reads his/her text.
Student B writes. Then student B
read his/her text, student A
writes.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 12 mins.
8. Tells students to compare their
texts and check their mistakes. - Compare and check.

1. Students work in groups. Activity 3: (15 mins)

2. Tells students to complete the Writing and speaking - Work in groups.
table about animals. - Complete the table.
3. Gives a time limit of 10 mins.
4. Each group chooses a reporter to
share their answers in class. - Choose a reporter to
share answers.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 158

1. Asks students to look at the Step IV: - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Compare with a partner.
2. Compare with a partner. up (5 mins)
3. Asks students how they feel I can talk about my - Show the class their feelings.
about the can do statements. family. I can draw my
family tree.
I can compare three or more people
and things.
I can describe myself and my
friends.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
smart elephant. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 12 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 159

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 12: Monsters!
- Lesson A: Monsters! – The scariest monster
- Pages: 74-75
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about who is the best at a variety of activities.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the one who is the best at a
variety of activities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Tells students to guess what you Step II: - Look at the board & guess.
are drawing on the board. Draws Warmer/Review (5 mins)
a monster. Warmer/Lead in
2. Asks What this is called in - Respond: monster.
English?
3. Asks Are you scared of - Respond.
monsters?
1. Asks students to look at the Students guess (2 mins) - Look at the picture & answer.
picture. What can they see?
2. Asks Are you scared? - Respond.
3. Asks Is Dara scared of the - Respond.
monster?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 160

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Monsters! – The scariest
- What is the title about? monster

1. Tells students that they are Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Ask & answer.
4. Asks and answers as a class.
5. Asks students if they can - Share ideas.
guess who the monster really
is. Gets some answers from - Listen to tape.
the class.
6. Tells students to listen and to
look at the picture to find out
what the monster really is. Activity 2: (5 mins) - Look at the questions.
Students listen for the answers
1. Tells students to look at the
questions and to try and
guess and remember the
answers.
2. Tells students not to write - Check their guesses.
yet, because it will take too
much time to correct.
3. Tells students that they are
going to check their guesses and - Compare answers.
memory from the recording.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Check answers.
5. Tells students to compare their
answers with their Activity 3: (5 mins) - Look at the pictures & answer.
group/partner. Grammar
6. Checks answers as a class.

1. Writes 1.2.3. down the side of - Listen carefully.

the board. Tells students to look
at the pictures. Asks What
pictures are scary?
2. Asks Which one is just a little
scary. Writes it next to number 1
Asks students which is number 2
for scary. Writes it next to
number 2. Asks which picture - Do the others.
they think is the most scary.
Writes the letter next to number
3.
3. Asks students to do the others. - Compare answers.
4. Asks instruction checking - Respond.
questions and gives a 3 minute
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 161
 limit.
5. Asks students to compare.
6. Asks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 162

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (5 mins) - Look at the pictures.
pictures. Points to the first Controlled practice
picture Says: He is… Students:
Old!
2. Writes Old on the board Says - Look at the board & respond.
Old and point to the second
column in activity 4 Old
Students: Older. Writes Older on
the board. Points to the column
3. Students: Oldest!
3. Tells students to continue with
other words in their notebooks.
Gives students a 3 minute limit.
4. Students compare. - Compare answers.
5. Asks answers from the class. - Respond.

1. Asks: Who is the oldest? Guess Activity 5: (5 mins) - Guess & respond.
who in the class you think is the
oldest. Writes it next to number
1.
2. Tells students to answer the rest - Answer the rest of questions.
of the questions.
3. Tells them it‟s ok to be
wrong: just guess!
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
5. Do not check answers, but you
can ask 1 or 2 students for their
ideas. There are not right and
wrong answers though, because
this is about opinion activity 6 is
to prepare for the writing and its
important students feel their
ideas are good.

1. Tells students to quickly read Activity 6: (5 mins) - Read the text quickly.
the text in activity 6. Asks Is our Preparing for writing
class the same or different? This
is to give students an idea about
the writing structure.
2. Asks Is our class the same or - Answer.
different? Students: different.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 7: ( 10 mins) - Write about their class.
going to write about their class. Writing
They should use the ideas they
wrote in activity 7 and the model
in model in exercise 6.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 163

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 164
1. Asks some students to tell the Step IV: - Tell the class about their class.
class about their class. Learner assessment and lesson wrap
up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
scared monster. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 12 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 165

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 12: Monsters!
- Lesson B: Monsters! – The green monster
- Pages: 76-77
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about who is the best at a variety of activities.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the one who is the best at a
variety of activities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Step II: - Work in groups of 4.

2. Asks students to take out their Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully.
homework (writing) from last Warmer/Lead in
time.
3. Tells students to read and
complete their writing. Do they
agree? Tells students that it is
important for them to pay
attention to their friends and be
polite.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Allow students a few minutes to
compare their work.
6. Asks a few students to read their
work to the class and asks the

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 166

 rest of the class if they agree or
not.
1. Asks students to look at the Students guess (2 mins) - Look at the picture & cover the
picture and to cover the text. text.
2. Asks who can you see? How - Respond.
does she feel?
3. Allows students a minute to talk - Talk to partner.
to their partners.
4. Compare ideas as a class. - Compare ideas.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (30 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: Monsters! – The green
monster

1. Tells students that they are Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and check for Students read and listen for the big
their guesses. idea
2. Tells students to read along with
their finger. This helps students
with dyslexia and also helps
you check no one is lost.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Students listen and read along - Listen along with their fingers.
with their fingers.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answer with their
group/partner. - Check answers.
6. Check the answer as a class.
Activity 2: (10 mins) - Respond.
1. Writes: Do people hang out with Students read for the answers
Bopha every day? On the board.
Asks students if they can work
out the answer as a class. Asks
students to point to where they
found the answer.
2. Writes No they don‟t. on
the board.
3. Gives students a 5 mins limit.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare answers.
5. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Check answers.
6. Check answers as a class.
Activity 3: (7 mins) - Respond.
1. Says who is the best at Controlled Practice and new words
homework? Put up your hand if
you are the best at homework! - Respond.
2. Concept checking question: say
Look! There are lots of people
who are good at homework! Is
there a right or wrong answer
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 167
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 168
 then? Students: No. There are
lots of different right answers. - Answer the questions.
3. Tells students to answer the
questions according to their own
ideas and gives 5 mins.

1. Tells students that they are going Activity 4: (3 mins) - Talk about the answers.
to talk about the answers as a Class discussion
class. Make sure students
understood that we don‟t bully
or make negative people in class.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 5: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and learn a chant Chant!
together.
2. Plays the recording. - Listen.
3. Plays the recording again. Have - Listen again.
students say the words and clap
and click.
4. Tells students that you are
going to have them do the chant
in their groups. Tells students to
use the pictures to help them.
5. Finally do the chant as a whole - Whole class does the chant.
class. Have students yell out
who they think is the best at
activities as in the recording.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they would do if they saw homework.
a monster.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 12 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 169

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 4: In my family
- Unit 12: Monsters!
- Lesson C: Monsters! – The hungry monster
- Pages: 78-79
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about who is the best at a variety of activities.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the one who is the best at a
variety of activities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activities Contents Student’s Activities

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Tells students to stand up. Step II: - Listen carefully and raise
2. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) questions if they have
3. Tells students to decide on a Warmer: The acting game any.
team name.
4. Have one student from each
group go to the board and face
the class so they cannot see the
board.
5. Writes a word on the board (e.g.
fishing). Tells students facing
the rest of the class Guess the
word and pretend to fish. If no
one has guessed it after a minute,
tells them to look at the board.
6. Rules:
- The people at the board can talk.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 170

- The people trying to act and
show the word are not allowed
to talk.
7. People who cheat lose a point.
8. Play the game. Use the words - Play the game.
from the unit (do homework,
study, work, go to school, watch
TV,).

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (30 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: Monsters! – The hungry
monster
1. Teaches the word opposite Activity 1: (4 mins) - Listen carefully.
through examples (black/white Review new words
up/down).
2. Tells students to look at the - Look at the pictures.
picture. Points to a. Asks is she
young? Students: No, she is old.
Asks who is young?? Students
point to the baby (m).
3. Tells students to match the - Match the pictures
pictures with the opposite. Tells with opposite.
them not to write. Point. Gives
a time limit of 2 mins for this.
Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Checks the answers as a class - Check answers.

1. Look at the first word in activity Activity 2: (6 mins) - Look at the first word.
2 (young). New words
2. Asks students to decide which - Decide on the picture.
picture is Young. (m) have
students match the words with
the pictures.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
4. Students compare with their - Compare answers.
group/partner.
5. Listen and check. - Listen & check.
6. Asks students what the
comparative and superlative
adjectives are. (1 minute)

1. Tells students that they are Activity 3: (2 mins) - Listen & check.
going to listen and check their Students guess
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare their answers
with their partner/group - Checks answers.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 171
4. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 172

1. Tells students to try and Activity 4: (5 mins) - Try & remember/guess.
remember/guess if it was Dara of Students listen for the answers
Sophal. Sets a 3 mins limit. - Write a-f in notebooks.
2. Tells students to write a-f in
their notebooks. Then tells them
to listen and write D for Dara
and S for Sophal.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Students listen. - Listen.
5. Students compare. - Compare.

1. Tells students to read the text in Activity 5: (3 mins) - Read the text.
activity 5 quickly. Asks Is your Preparing for writing – looking at a
family the same or different? model
2. Asks Is your family the same or - Respond.
different? Students: different!

1. Tells students that they are Activity 6: (10 mins) - Write about their family.
going to write about their Writing
family. - Use activity 5 as a model.
2. They can use activity 5 as a
model.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 9 mins.
Step IV: (5 mins)
Learner assessment and lesson wrap
1. Asks students to look at the up - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. I can say who the biggest, youngest,
2. Compare with a partner. oldest in my family are. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can talk about who the best at
about the can do statements. something is. - Show the feelings.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their family. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 13 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 173
 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 13: Guess what I‟ve got
- Lesson A: Guess what I‟ve got – My friend Tom
- Pages: 80-81
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing how your classmates and some monsters look.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe how their classmates and
monsters look through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

2. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (5 mins) question if they have any.
- Tells students that they have a Game! Magic Finger – Colour Race
magic finger. Shows them your
magic finger. Asks students to
hold up their magic fingers.
- Tells students that you will say
a colour and they have to touch
something that colour with
magic finger.
- Rules: if you touch the wrong
colour, you are out. If you are
the last one to touch a colour,
you are out.
- Says a colour (e.g. green)
students touch something that is

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 174

 green with their “magic finger”
(e.g. a bag or a pen).
- Tells students that they are
touching the wrong colour to sit
down.
- Repeat until there is a winner. - Whole class plays the game.
Everyone claps!

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (45 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: Guess what I‟ve got –
My friends

1. Asks: What colour are my eyes? Activity 1: (2 mins) - Answer.

Students: Brown! New words - Look and listen.
2. Points to number 2 and says:
I have got brown eyes.
3. Tells students to tell their - Tell their partners the things they
partners which things they have have got.
got.

1. Tells students to write the new Activity 2: (8 mins) - Write new words next to the
words next to the letter of the New words letter of the picture in notebook.
picture in their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students to compare with - Compare answers.
their group/partner before they
listen and check.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat as a class.

1. Asks students to look at Students guess (2 mins) - Look at the picture & answer
the picture. What can they the questions.
see? - Answer.
2. Asks students who is in the
picture? What are they doing? - Answer.
3. Asks students why is Linda
smiling? - Compare answers/guesses.
4. Students compare their guesses
with their partner for a minute.
1. Tells students that they are Activity 3: (5 mins) - Listen & check.
going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare answers.
3. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Check as a class.
4. Check answers as a class.
- Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Activity 4: (5 mins) - Try and
partner. Students listen for the answers remember/guess
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 175
2. Tells students to try and answers.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 176

 remember/guess what the
answers are. Gives a 3 mins
limit.
3. Tells students to write 1-6 in - Write 1-6 & tick/cross.
their notebooks and then to tick
and cross.
4. Students correct incorrect - Correct incorrect sentences.
sentences in their books.
5. Students compare. - Compare answers.
6. Asks for answers as a class. - Share answers.

1. Asks students to look at Activity 5: (5 mins) - Look at the grammar box.

the grammar box. Grammar
2. Writes 1. We use have got/has - Respond.
got with I, you, we, they. Asks
students which. Asks students to
point to the example sentence
where they found the answer.
3. Tells students to continue - Answer the questions in
answering the questions in their notebooks.
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 3 mins
time limit.
5. Students compare. - Compare answers.
6. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Asks students to look at Activity 6: (5 mins) - Look at the picture of the

the picture of the monster. Controlled practice monster.
2. Writes: He is got big feet. Asks: - Respond.
Is that right? Students: No!
Writes: He has got big feet.
Asks: Is that right? Students:
Yes! - Answer the questions in
3. Tells students to continue notebooks.
answering questions in their
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 3 mins
time limit.
5. Students compare. - Compare answers.
6. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer.

1. Tells students that you want Activity 7: (13 mins) - Listen carefully and to draw
them to draw their own monster Free practice a monster.
and colour it in. Tells students
that the monster can be as scary
or cute as they like.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 3 mins
time limit.
3. Tells students to write sentences - Write sentences about monster.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 177
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 178
 about monster!
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
time limit.
5. Asks students to talk about their - Talk about monster with partner.
monster with their partner.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a 4 mins time
limit.

Step IV:
1. Asks 2 or 3 students to share Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Share their pictures & sentences.
their pictures and sentences with up (5 mins)
the class.
2. Asks students to vote on the - Vote on the scariest monster!
scariest monster.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what their parents have got. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 13 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 179

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 13: Guess what I‟ve got
- Lesson B: Guess what I‟ve got – Guess who!
- Pages: 82-83
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing how your classmates and some monsters look.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe how their classmates and
monsters look through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Writes the words to the song on Warmer/Review (10 mins) question if they have any.
the board. Song!
- Tells the students that they are
going to learn a song.
- Plays the recording once and
have students join in when they
know the words.
- Shows students the actions to the
song (touch the body part as you
say the word).
- Sing the song and do the actions
together as a class.
- Sing the song faster and faster. - Sing the song together.
Who can keep up?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 180

1. Writes the word Thief on the Lead in (3 mins) - Look at the board to answer.
board and asks students if they
know what it means. Asks the
answer and if no one guesses,
tells them it is someone who
steals.
2. Asks students some questions to - Answer.
get them to think about thieves.
What do they steal?

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (31 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: Guess what I‟ve got –
Guess who!

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture & to cover
picture (and to cover the text). Students guess the text.
What can they see? - Guess who the thief is.
2. Tells students that one of the -
people they can see on the page
has stolen something from
Dara. Can they guess who?
Tells students to talk to their
partner/group.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 min.
4. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 2: (6 mins) - Listen carefully.

hear some clues from Dara Students read/listen for the big
about who the thief is. idea/answers
2. Tells students to read along with
their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the
recording! - Listen & Read along with
4. Students listen and read along fingers.
with their fingers. - Use the clues to discuss on the
5. Tells students to use the clues to thief.
discuss who they think the thief
is with their partner. - Check their guesses.
6. Checks students guess as a class.
Writes some guesses on the
board.
Activity 3: (1 min) - Check their guesses.
1. Tells students to check their Students check their guesses
guesses at the back of the book.
Were they right? Who was
closest? Activity 4: (5 mins) - Look at the picture & to answer.
1. Tells students to look at the Vocabulary review
picture and answer the questions.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 181
2. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 182

 questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with a partner.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Writes 1-20 on the board. Activity 5: (2 mins) - Look at the board.

2. Tells students to look at the Modeling the game
photos. Asks how many photos? - Look at the photos.
Students: 20!
3. Tells one student to pick a photo - One picks a photo to write
between 1 and 20 and to write the number.
the number on a piece of paper
but NOT TO TELL YOU.
4. Asks 5-6 yes/no questions and - Answer.
cross the number as you
eliminate them. (e.g. is it a
girl?). yes cross out the
numbers for boys). Have they
got long hair? Yes! Cross out
all the numbers of people who
have short hair.
5. After 5 questions, guess which
person from the photos.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 5: (15 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
going to play the same game. Game! questions if they have
2. Drills the “Useful Language” any.
in the box.
3. Tells students the rules
Rules:
- Students play against a partner.
- First, students choose a photo
between 1-20. The students write
the number somewhere secret
(so students don‟t change their
mind and cheat!). students take it
turns to ask yes/no questions to
try and guess who their partner
has chosen. If you ask a question
and the answer is no, it is the
other persons turn… if you ask a
question and the answer is yes,
you get to ask another question.
The first person to guess their
partners number (photo) is the
winner.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Play the game.
of 10-15 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 183

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 184
 Step IV:
1. Asks a few pairs who won. Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
2. Asks students what they found up (3 mins)
out about their partners „Guess - Share ideas found from their
who‟. Tells the whole class to partners.
listen along and see if they
could guess the person as well!
3. Thanks students for their hard
work.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
thief they have ever known. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 13 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 185

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 13: Guess what I‟ve got
- Lesson C: Guess what I‟ve got – Is that him?
- Pages: 84-85
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing how your classmates and some monsters look.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe how their classmates and
monsters look through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Puts the class into 2 teams (right Warmer/Review (5 mins) question if they have any.
side vs left side) Spelling badminton!
- Tells students that they have 30
seconds to decide on a team
name.
- Asks students if they can play
badminton. Asks who is the best
at badminton?
- Tells students that they are
going to play spelling
badminton. Tells students that
they have one minute to look at
the word list from the unit. At
the end of a minute, claps your
hand. Books closed!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 186

- Asks one “player” from each
team to come to the in front of
the room.
- Gives them a racket each one.
(There is no racket! That‟s
funny!)
- Shows the class how to play.
Says a word. (e.g. UGLY).
Stands where the student 1 is.
Says U. Then stands where the
student 2 is. Says G. Then stands
where the student 1 is. Says L.
Then stands where the student 2
is. Says I. asks: Is that right?
Students: No!
- Rules: if students don‟t use the - Play the game.
“racket”, they die and the other
team gets a point. If a student
takes too long, the ball hits the
ground and they die. If a student
says the last letter of the word
correctly, their team gets a point.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (47 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: Guess what I‟ve got –
Is that him?

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture & to cover
picture and to cover the text at Students guess the text.
the bottom with another book.
What can they see?
2. Asks students what is - Respond.
happening?
3. Students compare their guesses - Compare their guesses.
with their partner for a minute.
4. Come back together as a class - Share ideas.
and get some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (10 mins) - Read to know who Tom is.
going to read along with Linda Model for speaking game
and Bopha and try and get clues
about which one Tom is.
2. Tells students to discuss who - Discuss with partner.
they think Tom is with their
partner and WHY.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Asks some ideas as a class. - Share ideas about Tom.
Takes a class vote. (e,g, who is
think it‟s the one on the right?
Put up your hand!)
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 187
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 188
5. Tells the class to look at the
answer on page 232.

1. Tells students to work with their Activity 3: (10 min) - Listen carefully and raise
partner. They are going to play a Game! questions if they have
guessing game. any.
2. Tells students the rules.
Rules: first students choose a student
and write their name somewhere
secret. (so students don‟t change
their mind halfway through!) if you
asks a question and the answer is no,
it is the other persons turn. If you
ask a question and the answer is yes,
you get another question. The first
person to guess the other persons kid
is the winner and gets 5 points. NO
PUT DOWN. If students say mean
and nasty things like Is she ugly?
They lose all their points!
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Play the game.
of 10 mins.

1. Books closed. Writes: Do you Activity 4: (5 mins)

have any sisters? And Have Controlled practice - Close the books & answer.
you got any sisters? On the
board.
2. Asks students what the - Respond.
difference is. Gives them a
minute to discuss with their
partner. Asks the answer as a
class. (They mean exactly the
same)
3. Tells students that they have 4 - Write sentences.
mins to write as many sentences
as they can using the pictures in
Activity 4.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. At the end of the time, clap your - Stop writing.
hands, tells students to put their
pens down and asks How
many? - Read their sentences.
6. Asks the student with the most
to read out their answers. Are
they all correct? Activity 5: (10 mins)
Game! - Draws 5 things in notebooks.
1. Tells students to draw 5 things in
their notebooks. - Listen carefully.
2. Tells students they are going to
play a game.
3. Rules: students take it turns to
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 189
 ask “Have you got any…?” and
“Do you have any…?” questions

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 190

 to their partner. They must
answer very quickly but they
have to use the right short
answer. (yes, I have. Yes, I do. )
4. If they say the wrong thing or
take too long, the other player
gets a point. Tells students to
record their points on a separate
piece of paper.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
limit.
6. At the end of time, clap your
hands and find out who the
winners were.

1. Asks students to answer the Activity 6: (10 mins) - Answer the questions.
questions about them in their Personalization
notebooks using full short
answers.
2. Asks instruction checking
question.
3. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with their partner.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can ask what people have got. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say what people have and - Show the class the feelings.
about the can do statements. haven‟t got.
I can name some parts of the body.

Step V:
Closing (3 mins)
1. Tells students to write what Homework: - Listen and take note of the
you have and haven‟t got. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 14 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 191

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 14: How do you feel today?
- Lesson A: How do you feel today? – Get out of bed!
- Pages: 86-87
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about you and your friends feel today.
~ Describing what makes you and your friends feel sad, unhappy, angry, etc.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feeling and their friends
feeling & describe something makes them and their friends feel sad and unhappy through speaking &
writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Uses the board eraser or a Warmer/Review (5 mins) question if they have any.
pencil case. Asks What is it? „Pass the eraser‟
Talk into it like a phone.
Students: it‟s a phone.
- Tells students that they are
going to play a game in their
groups.
- Rules: you get a point if your
friends can guess what you are
pretending the eraser is. But all
the members lose a point if they
can‟t guess. The person with the
eraser is not allowed to talk.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 192
 The
group must speak in English!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 193

 Some ideas: an egg, a bird, a cat,
a pen, a notebook, lunch, an
apple, an orange, a friend, a
game.
- Asks instruction checking - Whole class plays the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: How do you feel today? –
Get out of bed!

1. Books closed. Asks students Activity 1: (2 mins) - Close the books

how they feel today. Students remember words
2. Books open. Asks students to - Show the feeling.
tell their friends which picture
they feel the most like.

1. Tells students to work in Activity 2: (7 mins) - Work in groups.

groups to write the new words New words
next to the letter of the picture
in their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check their answers.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.
1. Asks students to look at the Students guess (2 mins) - Look at the picture.
picture in activity 3. What can
they see?
2. Asks students What can you see - Answer the question.
in the picture?
3. Asks students Why is Dara bed? - Respond.
4. Students compare with their
partner for a minute. - Compare answers.
5. Comes back together as a class
and gets some different ideas. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses. - Listen.
2. Students listen. - Compare.
3. Students compare. - Check.
4. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (7 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. - Try &
2. Tells students to try and remember/guess
remember/guess if the True/False.
sentences were true or false.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 194
 Gives a 3
mins limit.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 195

3. Tells students to write 1-6 in - Write 1-6 in notebooks/Tick &
their notebooks. Then tell them Cross.
to listen and Tick and Cross the
numbers as they hear them.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Students listen. - Listen.
6. Students compare. - Compare.
7. Asks for some answers as a - Share answers.
class.

1. Books closed. Writes I feel Activity 5: (10 mins) - Close the books & look at the
bored when… on the board and Writing board.
gets 3 or 4 ideas from students
about how to end the sentence.
(e.g. I feel bored when I am at
home. I feel bored when I am
in maths. I feel bored when I
don’t have school).
2. Tells students to complete the - Complete the sentences about
sentences about them. them.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives an 8 mins
time limit.

1. Writes: Do you feel when Activity 6: (8 mins) - Look at the board & listen
you ? On the board. Asks Game! Find someone the same as carefully.
some students how to complete you
the sentence. Gets 2 or 3
different ideas.
2. Tells students that they are - Listen carefully.
going to play a game and try to
find people who are the same as
them from their list.
3. Rules: - asks your classmates
questions to find out if the same
things make them happy. If they
are the same as you, you can
write down their name. You
cannot write their name if they
are different to you. You must
have half boy and half girls. You
can only write any name once!
4. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to report back Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Report back on who the same
on who they found that was the up (3 mins) them was.
same as them.
2. Do the examples they give
match the vocab?
3. Listens for 3rd person singular - Think of 3rd person singular.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 196
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 197
 „S‟ Sophal feels /fi:lz/ happy
when he passes /pa:siz/ an exam.
4. Are they using a full clause after
when?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
activities they often do after they homework.
get up.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 14 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 198

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 14: How do you feel today?
- Lesson B: How do you feel today? – How does it make you feel?
- Pages: 88-89
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about you and your friends feel today.
~ Describing what makes you and your friends feel sad, unhappy, angry, etc.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feeling and their friends
feeling & describe something makes them and their friends feel sad and unhappy through speaking &
writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Asks students to stand up. Can Warmer/Review (5 mins) question if they have any.
they remember Heads, Warmer: „Sing the song‟
Shoulders, Knees and Toes
from the last unit?
- Sing it as a class.
- Says one of the new words and
sings the song again in that
emotions (e.g. sad! Half crying
half singing)
- Repeat with 3-4 emotions (e.g. - Whole class sings the song.
happy, sick, bored, excited).

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 199

1. Puts students into groups of 4. Lead in (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4 & to choose
Asks students to choose one the writer.
person to be the writer.
2. Tells students to brainstorm as - Brainstorm on animals.
many animals as they can.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Finds out which group got the - Compare answers.
most. Students compare answers
as a class.

1. Asks students to look at the Students guess (2 mins) - Look at the picture & cover
picture and to cover the text. the text.
What can they see? - Answer.
2. Asks students how many
animals they can name in the
picture.
3. Asks students How does Sophal - Answer.
feel about animals?
4. Students compare with a partner - Compare answers.
for a minute.
5. Come back together as a class to - Share ideas.
get some different ideas.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (34 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: How do you feel today? –
How does it make you feel?

1. Tells students that they are Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
going to listen and check their Students read and listen for the big questions if they have
guesses. idea any.
2. Tells students to read along with
their finger. This helps students
with dyslexia and also helps
you check no one is lost.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Fingers ready?
Plays the recording.
4. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers with their
group/partner. - Check answers.
6. Checks the answers as a class. Activity 2: (10 mins)
Students read for the answers - Look & answer.
1. Writes Who does Sophal go to
when he thinks people don‟t
understand him? On the board.
Asks students the answer. Asks
students to show you where they
found the answer in the text.
2. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 200
 questions and gives a 5 mins
time limit.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 201

3. Students complete. - Complete.
4. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to work in Activity 3: (3 min) - Work in groups of 4 & discuss

groups of 4 and discuss the Post task the questions.
questions.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare answers.
3. Compare answers as a class.
Activity 4: (3 mins) - Look at the pictures & try
1. Tells students to look at the Review vocabulary to remember the words.
pictures and try to remember the
words.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. (2 mins) - Share answers.
3. Asks and answers as a class. (30
seconds)
Activity 5: (3 mins) - Look at the picture & answer.
1. Asks students to look at Listen to the model of the game
the picture. What can they
see? What are Bopha and
Dara doing? - Compare answers.
2. Students compare with their
partner for a minute. - Share ideas.
3. Comes back together as a class
and gets some different ideas. - Listen & check.
4. Listen again and check. - Check as a class.
5. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 6: (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
1. Tells students to take out their Game! You will have to set up this questions if they have
notebooks and to write one activity step by step so that students any.
feeling. Keep it secret! don‟t say “I have no ideas”
2. Tells students to write 2 or 3
reasons that someone might feel
this feeling. Asks instruction
checking questions and gives a
3 mins limit.
3. Tells students to stand up. They
will need a pen and a piece of
paper.
4. Tells students that they are going
to play the same game as Bopha
and Dara. Rules: if you speak in
Khmer, you lose your points. If
you guess how your friend feels,
you get a point. If someone
guesses how you feel, you get a
point.
5. Tells students to show their
feeling to as many people as
possible during the time.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 202
6. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 203

 questions and gives a 5 mins - Play the game.
limit.

Step IV:
1. Asks a few students to act their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Show their feeling to the class.
feeling for the class. Have the up (2 mins)
class guess the feelings.
2. Monitor the students‟
pronunciation. Are they putting
the stress in the right place? (e.g
HAPpy not hapPY).

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about how Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their dog/cat makes you feel. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 14 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 204

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 14: How do you feel today?
- Lesson C: How do you feel today? – I know how you feel
- Pages: 90-91
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about you and your friends feel today.
~ Describing what makes you and your friends feel sad, unhappy, angry, etc.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their feeling and their friends
feeling & describe something makes them and their friends feel sad and unhappy through speaking &
writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Writes some first meeting vocab Warmer/Review (10 mins) question if they have any.
on the board. E.g. Hi. How are Warmer: „Feeling greetings‟
you? What‟s your name?
- Tells students to stand up. (You
can have student work in groups
if it is too small to have students
walking around the room).
- Tells students that they are
going to do a get to know you
role play.
- Have students do the activity
once normally.
- Tells students to choose a
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 205
 different partner, but this time
their parents have given their
sister $100 and given them
nothing! How do they feel? Tell
students to have the conversation
with this feeling.
- Keep changing the situation - Start the conversation.
(and partners!). Dog is deed.
You have a million dollars! Etc.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (35 mins )
What is the title about? Lesson C: How do you feel today? –
I know how you feel

1. Asks students to look at Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they Students guess
see? - Answer.
2. Asks students How do the
people feel?
3. Asks students Why? - Compare answers.
4. Students talk and compare with
their partner for 3 mins. - Share ideas.
5. Comes back together and
gets some different ideas.
Activity 2: (10 mins) - Write 1-8 in notebooks.
1. Tells students to write 1-8 in Matching activity
their notebooks.
2. Writes “My best friend doesn‟t
like me anymore.” On the board.
Asks “Who says this?” students:
B. - Write the letters next to the
3. Tells students to write the letters numbers.
next to the number in their
notebook.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
time limit. - Compare answers.
5. Students compare. - Listen & check.
6. Students listen and check.
Activity 3: (5 min) - Look at the board & answer.
1. Writes My best friend doesn‟t New words review
like me anymore. On the board.
Asks how do they feel?
Students: sad - Write the feelings next to the
2. Tells students to write the numbers.
feelings next to the number in
their notebooks.
3. Gives a 3 mins time limit and
asks instruction checking
questions. - Listen & check.
4. Students listen and check.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 206

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 207
1. Tells one student that you know Activity 4: (15 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
them. Game! questions if they have
2. Drops an eraser onto the book any.
and see where it lands.
3. Tells students which picture
the eraser is on. (e.g. Hungry.)
4. Says something you think might
be true about this student and
this feeling (e.g. You feel hungry
when you don‟t have breakfast.)
says Is that right? Students: Yes,
that‟s right or No, that‟s not
right.
5. Tells students that they are
going to play a game like this.
6. Rules: students take turns to
drop the eraser onto the book. If
they can guess a fact about their
partner, they get a point. If they
don‟t guess, they don‟t get a
point.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 10 mins
limit.
8. At the end of the time, clap your
hands and find out who was the - Play the game.
winner in each group.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the “can Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
do” statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can say how I feel. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say when my friends and I feel - Show their feeling to the class.
about the can do statements. things.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about how Homework: - Listen and take note of the
they feel about their parents. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 15 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 208

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 15: What in the world are you wearing?
- Lesson A: What in the world are you wearing? – I‟m wearing something scary!
- Pages: 92-93
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing what you‟re wearing and talking about what you usually wear.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what they‟re wearing &
talk about what they usually wear through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Tells students to ask you any Warmer/Review (5 mins) question if they have any.
questions they want. Answer Warmer: „Banana-na‟
Banana-na! Answer 4 questions
like this.
- Tells students that they are
going to play this game in
groups.
- Rule: - students work in groups
and chose one person to be
“it”.
- The student has to answer 5
questions with Bananana. They
cannot laugh or pause. If they
make it to the end of 5 questions,
they get 5 points. If the group

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 209

 make them laugh, they get one
point.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 210

- Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:

lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (40 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: What in the world are you
wearing? – I‟m wearing something
scary!
1. Tells students to cover exercise Activity 1: (2 mins) - Cover the exercise 2 & tell
2 and tell their partner what they New words partner what they‟re
are wearing today. Tells students wearing today.
to point to the pictures. (e.g. I‟m
wearing 1,6 and 9)
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.

1. Tells students to write 1-10 in Activity 2: (5 mins) - Write 1-10.

their book. Writes 1 on the New words
board. - Look & respond.
2. Tells students to look at number
one. Says What‟s this? Students:
a shirt. Asks and point at number
one. Says What do I write here
then? Students: b.
3. Tells students to match the other - Match the numbers with the
numbers and letters in their letters.
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Students compare their answers - Compare answers.
with their group/partner.
6. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check their answers.
7. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat and point to the pictures
as they hear them.

1. Asks students to look at Activity 3: (2 min) - Look at the picture & answer.
the picture. What can they Students guess
see?
2. Points to the picture of the kids
in costume. Asks Which is the
scariest? Best? - Compare answers.
3. Students compare with partner
for a minute. - Share answers.
4. Comes back together as a class
and gets some different ideas.
Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Lead in and listening for the big idea
going to listen and match the
people with their costumes. - Listen.
2. Students listen. - Compare answers.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 211
3. Students compare with their

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 212

 group/partner.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 5: (7 mins) - Work with a partner.

partner. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students to write 1-8 in - Write 1-8 in notebooks.
their notebooks. Tells students to
try and remember/guess the
answers.
3. Tells them to listen and write the - Write the answers next to the
answers next to the numbers in numbers.
their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Students listen. - Listen.
6. Students compare. - Compare.
7. Asks for some answers as a - Share answers.
class.

1. Tell students to shut their books. Activity 6: (2 mins) - Shut the books.
2. Writes Scary dress ups on the Brainstorming – class discussion - Look at the board.
board.
3. Asks students what other scary - Think & talk.
dress ups they can think of.
Gives them a minute to talk to
their partner and gets ideas
from the class. - Listen carefully.
4. Talks as a class about how you
could dress up as three things
(e.g. A white dress on your
head and be a ghost).

1. Tells students that you want Activity 7: (5 mins) - Draw the Halloween costume.
them to draw their own Prepare to speak
Halloween costume. Tells them
to be creative like Bopha!
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 3 mins
limit.

1. Collects all the students‟ Activity 8: (12 mins) - Gives the paper to the teacher.
papers together. Game!
2. Drills target language. What are - Answer.
you wearing? I‟m wearing .
3. Tells students to come and - Collect one is not theirs.
collect a piece of paper that is
not their own.
4. Tells students that they need
to keep it secret.
5. Have students ask “What are you - Find the owner of the paper.
wearing?” questions to try and
find their piece of paper.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 213

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 214
 Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell the class what
class what they are wearing up (2 mins) they‟re wearing.
in their picture.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
costumes they usually wear homework.
when they go out.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 15 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 215

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 15: What in the world are you wearing?
- Lesson B: What in the world are you wearing? – I look cool
- Pages: 94-95
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing what you‟re wearing and talking about what you usually wear.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what they‟re wearing &
talk about what they usually wear through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

1. Gives instructions: Step II: - Listen carefully and raise

- Stands in front of the class and Warmer/Review (5 mins) question if they have any.
says What am I wearing? Warmer: What are you wearing?
- Mime putting on 2 or 3 pieces of
clothing (e.g. pretend to put on
shoes, socks, and a hat.
- Asks students What am I
wearing? Shoes, socks, hat!
- Tells students to work in - Play the game.
groups 4 and take it in turns to
pretend to put on an item of
clothing.
Can their friends guess?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 216

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III:
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (42 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: What in the world are you
wearing? – I look cool

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the cartoon & answer.
cartoon but not to read the text. Students guess
What can they see?
2. Asks students to guess what is - Guess what is happening in the
happening in the picture. picture.
3. Students compare with their - Compare ideas.
partner for a minute.
4. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to read and check their Students read for the big idea
guesses and answer the question
“Why is Dara wearing a sock on
his head?”
2. Tells students to read the
cartoon. This helps students with
dyslexia and also helps you
check no one is lost.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Students read the cartoon. - Read the cartoon.
5. Students compare their answer. - Compare answer.
6. Checks the answer as a class. - Check answer.

1. Do the first question together as Activity 3: (10 min) - Do the first question as a class.
a class. Have students point to Students read for the answers
where the answer is in the text.
2. Tells students to do the other - Do the other questions in
questions in their notebooks. notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
limit.
4. Students complete. - Complete.
5. Students compare answers. - Compare answers.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Students practice the tongue Activity 4: (10 mins) - Practice the tongue twister.
twister. Learn a tongue twister
2. Students practice, clap and - Practice, clap & repeat.
repeat.
3. Lets students work with their - Work with a partner for
partner for a few minutes to the tongue twister.
learn the tongue twister.
4. Comes back together as a class.
Recites as a class.
5. Tells students to replace “a - Use own ideas.
sock on your head” with their
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 217
 own

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 218

 ideas.
6. Race! Have 2 or more students - Read the tongue twister quickly.
read the tongue twister as
quickly as they can. Who
finished first?
7. Students practice the tongue
twister for homework and have
a competition the next day.

1. Asks students what is cool to Activity 5: (5 mins) - Respond.

wear after school? Gets 1 or 2 Brainstorming ideas for writing
ideas from the class.
2. Tells students that everyone has
a different idea of what cool is to
talk to their friends about what
they think is cool.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are going Activity 6: (5 mins) - Draw something cool for a boy
to draw something cool for a boy Making notes and a girl to wear after school.
to wear after school and
something cool for a girl to wear
after school. They can use
coloured pencil, or they can put
arrows and words for colours.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 7: (5 mins) - Look at the example.

example. Writing
2. Tells students to add - Add descriptions to the pictures.
descriptions to their
pictures.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
Step IV:
1. Pen down! Asks students to Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Decide on their favorite.
decide on their favourite in their up (3 mins)
group.
2. Vote as a class!
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Students practice the tongue Homework: - Listen and take note of the
twister for homework and have a homework.
competition the next day.
(Activity 4)
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 15 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 219
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 220
Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 221

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 5: Tell me about it!
- Unit 15: What in the world are you wearing?
- Lesson C: What in the world are you wearing? – Wear something special
- Pages: 96-97
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing what you‟re wearing and talking about what you usually wear.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe what they‟re wearing &
talk about what they usually wear through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Draws a picture of an Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
elephant on the board. Warmer: „Disappearing elephant‟ question if they have any.
2. Choose a word (e.g. shoes,
socks, a shirt, a skirt).
3. Writes a line for each letter
on the board.
4. Asks a student to guess a letter.
5. If the letter is in the word, writes
it in the correct space.
6. If the letter is not in the word,
writes it elsewhere on the board
and erases one part of the
elephant (i.e. begin with the
trunk, then the eye, then the
mouth, etc.)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 222

7. Repeats steps 4-6 until students
have guessed the word.
8. Puts students into groups of 5/6.
9. In groups, students play the - Play the game.
game. They take it in turns to
draw the elephant and lets other
students guess.

1. Books closed. Writes Weddings, Lead in (5 mins) - Close the books & look at the
Churches, Parties, and Dances words on the board.
on the board.
2. Gives students a minute to see - See the words if they know.
if they know any of the words.
3. Gets the word meanings from - Tells the meanings of words.
the class. If no one knows teach
these words.
4. Asks students to talk to their - Talk about the words on the
group about what they know board with partner/group.
about weddings, churches,
parties and dances.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (32 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: What in the world are you
wearing? – Wear something special

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture & cover
pictures and to cover the text. Students guess the text.
What can they see?
2. Asks students Who is dressed for - Respond.
a wedding, church, a dance?
3. Students compare with their - Compare answers.
partner for a minute.
4. Comes together as a class and - Share ideas.
gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are going Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
to read and check their guesses. Students read for the big idea
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the recording.
4. Students read along with their - Read.
fingers.
5. Tells students compare their - Compare answer.
answer with their
group/partner. - Check answer.
6. Checks answer as a class.
Activity 3: (10 min)
1. Writes Reginald is wearing Students read for the answers - Look at the board.
shorts and a T-shirt. On the
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 223
 board.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 224

2. Asks Is that right? Students: No, - Respond.
that‟s not right. Asks What is
Reginald wearing today?
Students: “He is wearing an
orange shirt, black trousers, and
black shoes”. Asks What does
Reginald usually wear?
Students: He usually wear shorts
and a T-shirt. - Writes 2 sentences.
3. Tells students write 2 similar
sentences about Kate, Faith and
Shin Mae How. Asks instruction
checking questions and gives a 5
mins limit.
4. Students complete. - Complete.
5. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Puts students into groups. Activity 4: (7 mins) - Work in groups.

2. Tells students to look at the Speaking
pictures. Asks what do you - Look at the pictures & respond.
usually wear to a wedding?
Students: I usually wear .
3. Tells students to talk in their - Listen carefully.
groups about what they usually
wear to these places.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 3 mins
limit.
5. Students talk. - Talk.
6. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Asks students to guess where Activity 5: (8 mins) - Guess where the teacher is.
you are. Close your eyes and Speaking. Game!
describe a place they know that
is not school. Students guess.
Tells students that when you
pretend like this, you imagine.
2. Tells students that they are - Listen carefully.
going to play a game. They
imagine that they are in one of
the places in the pictures and say
what they are wearing. Their
friends listen and get a point if
they guess correctly.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
limit.
4. Students play the game. - Play the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 225

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 226
 Step IV:
1. Asks students what they are Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
wearing today. up (3 mins)
2. Asks students what they usually - Respond.
wear to…
3. Are students using present - Use present simple & present
simple and continuous continuous.
appropriately?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they usually wear to a homework.
concert.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 16 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 227

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 16: I can do it!
- Lesson A: I can do it! – I can do it better!
- Pages: 98-99
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you can and cannot do.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they can and cannot do
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Shows students your pen. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells them you are thinking Warmer: „Word Association‟ question if they have any.
of some words about the pen.
3. Asks students to give you
answers. Uses questions to help
them (e.g. what colour is my
pen? What shape is it?)
4. Writes down words as students
tell them (e.g. pen – black,
long, write, school)
5. Puts students into groups of 5/6.
6. Tells students you are going
to say a word. Thinks of
words associated with the
word. Example: apple – red,

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 228

 fruit,

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 229

 food, eat, USA, ball-round,
football, basketball, volleyball,
white, black, orange, sports,
team school – bags, students,
desks, books, teachers, etc…
7. The group with the most number - Play the game.
of words wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: I can do it! – I can do it
better!

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 1: (5 mins) - Work with a partner.

partner. New words
2. In pairs, students look for the - Look for the words in
words in the picture. the pictures.
3. Tells students to match the - Match the words with
words with the pictures. the pictures.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students to close their Lead in (3 mins) - Close the books.

books.
2. Tells students that Dara and - Listen carefully.
Avorng can do some of the new
words.
3. Asks: Can Dara sing? Can - Answer: Yes, he can. No, he
Avorng sing? Students should can‟t.
say Yes, he can. No he can‟t. - Have a class vote!
4. Have a class vote. Counts how
many students think Avorng can
sing. Writes the number on the
board.
- How many students think Dara
can play guitar?
- How many students think Dara
can ride a bike?
5. Asks students who they think is
better, Dara or Avorng?

1. Tells students they are going Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

to listen to Avorng and Dara. Students listen for the big idea
2. Were their guesses right? Who - Guess.
do they think is better – Avorng
or Dara?
3. Tells students to open their - Listen & point to the pictures.
books and point to the pictures
as they can listen.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 230

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 231
1. Tells students to copy the table Activity 3: (5 min) - Copy the table into notebooks.
in their notebooks quickly. Students listen for the answers
Gives a time limit of 2 mins.
2. Tells students to listen again and - Listen again & tick
tick the sentences. the sentences.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers with their partners.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Tells students to listen and Activity 4: (4 mins) - Listen & repeat.

repeat. Students listen and repeat

1. Writes one sentence on the board Activity 5: (8 mins) - Look at the sentences on the
that is true about you (e.g. I can Writing board.
speak English).
2. Writes one more sentence that is
not true about you (e.g. I can
cook).
3. Tells students to guess which is - Think & guess.
right and which is wrong.
4. Have a class vote! How many - Have a class vote!
students think you can speak
English? How many students
think you can cook? Writes the
number on the board.
5. Tells students which is right - Get the real answer.
and which is wrong.
6. Tells students that they are - Do the same!
going to do the same. They will
write true and not true sentences
about them.
7. Gives a time limit of 6 mins.

1. Puts students into groups of 5/6. Activity 6: (7 mins) - Work in groups of 5/6.
2. Students take it in turns to Guessing game – speaking - Take turns to read their
read their sentences. Other sentences.
students say Yes, you can or
No, you can‟t.
3. Tells students not to write. They - Others just listen & say:
just listen and speak. Yes, you can or No, you
can‟t.
1. Puts students into different Activity 7: (6 mins)
groups. Speaking - Work in different groups.
2. Each group takes it in turn to
talk about their group mates - Take turns to talk about their
from the activity 6. group mates‟ sentences from
3. How many sentences can they the activity 6.
remember? - Remember sentences!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 232

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 233
 Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell you Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell about what they can /
about what they can / can‟t up (2 mins) can‟t do.
do. - Tell about what their friends can
2. Asks some students to tell you / can‟t do.
about what their friends can /
can‟t do.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what their parents can / can‟t homework.
do. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 16 on page 207 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 234

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 16: I can do it!
- Lesson B: I can do it! – I think I can fly!
- Pages: 100-101
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you can and cannot do.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they can and cannot do
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Tells students you are a clock. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Shows different times to Warmer: „Human Clock‟ question if they have any.
students. Use both your arms,
like this.
3. Asks: what time is it? Is it12
o‟clock? Students: it‟s 3.45.
No, it isn‟t.
4. Asks some students to try this
in front of the class.
5. Puts students in groups of 4/5.
6. Students in each group take it in - Play the game.
turns to be a human clock. They
asks other group members
questions.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 235

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: I can do it! – I think I can
fly!

1. Points to the picture. Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

2. Asks students: whose family is Lead in - Respond.
it? (Linda) who is the father?
Who is this? Who is the sister?
3. Asks students: what can her
brother do?
4. Students work in pairs. - Work in pairs.
5. Students take it in turns to - Take turns to guess.
guess what each of the family
members can / can‟t do.
6. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 2: (3 mins) - Read the text quickly.
quickly. Students read for the big idea
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers with their partners.
4. Asks Did you guess right?

1. Tells students to read the Activity 3: (5 min) - Read the sentences & answer.
sentences and answer Yes, Students read for the answers
he/she can. No, he/she can‟t
do.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Compare answers.
3. Asks students to compare their
answers with their
partners/groups. - Check answers.
4. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4/5.
1. Puts students into groups of 3/4. Speaking - Ask & answer questions.
2. Students ask and answer
questions (e.g. Can you ride a
bike?).
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
Activity 5: (15 mins) - Copy the table in notebooks.
1. Tells students to copy the table Writing
in their notebooks. - Complete the table.
2. Students complete the table in
their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions
4. Gives a time limit of 10 mins.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 236
5. Writes this on the board: In my

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 237

 group, people can ride a
bike.
6. Asks some students: how many
students in your group can ride a
bike?
7. Writes the number on the board.
8. Tells students to complete the - Complete the sentences.
sentences in their notebooks.
9. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.

1. Students make a bar graph of Activity 6: (10 mins) - Make a bar graph.
their results. Writing
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students to talk about Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Talk about their pictures / charts.
their pictures / charts. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they think they can / homework.
can‟t do next month.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 16 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 238

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 16: I can do it!
- Lesson C: I can do it! – Avorng can speak English!
- Pages: 102-103
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you can and cannot do.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they can and cannot do
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks students what they can / Warmer/Review (12 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
can‟t do. Writes the words on Warmer: „DIY Bingo!‟ question if they have any.
the board. (e.g. ride a bike, run,
draw, jump, etc.).
2. Writes about 12-15 words. Help
students remember the words by
acting, if necessary.
3. Draws this grid on the board.
Students copy the grid.

4. Tells students to choose 9 words

from the board. They write the
words into their grids.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 239

5. One student chooses a word
from his/her grid and calls it out.
6. She/He can cross out the word.
7. Other students who have the
word in their grids also cross out
the word.
8. Another student chooses a word
from his/her grid. Repeat step 5-
7.
9. The first student to cross out - Play the game.
ALL the words in his/her grid
is the winner and shouts
“Bingo!”
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (33 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: I can do it! – Avorng can
speak English!

1. Tells students that they are Activity 1: (15 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
going to play a game to find Speaking – Treasure hunt questions if they have
treasure. any.
2. Briefly talk about what treasure
is. What treasures do they like
(e.g. money, house and lot,
gold, diamond, etc.)?
3. Tells students that they need
some things to find the
treasure. They choose from the
list in the book.
4. Tells students to choose what
they can do. They choose from
the list in the book.
5. In pairs, students talk about what
they‟ve got and what they can
do.
6. Puts students into groups of 4/5.
7. Each student uses a counter (this
can be any small objects they
can find, e.g. pen, caps, erasers,
small pieces of paper).
8. Use dice to play the game. If
there are no dice, 2 students in
the group do rock, scissors and
paper. Whoever wins chooses a
number between 1&6 for the
next player.
9. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.
Activity 2: (10 mins)
1. Students work in pairs. Listen and correct - Work in pairs.
2. Student A is the reader. Student - Student A is the reader &
B is the listener. student B is the listener.
3. Student A reads the text on page - Student A reads on page 232.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 240
 232.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 241

4. Student B reads and listens. - Student B listens & looks for the
Student B looks for the mistakes mistakes on page 103.
in the text on page 103.
5. Students check their answers. - Check answers.

1. Students draw the pet. They use Activity 3: (8 min) - Draw a pet.
clues from the text. Drawing
2. Shows some of the best - Look at some pets.
pictures in class.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can say what I can do. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say what I can‟t do.
about the can do statements. I can ask what people can and - Show the class the feeling.
cannot do.
I can listen for mistakes.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what their brother / sister can homework.
/ can‟t do.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 17 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 242

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 17: It‟s my time!
- Lesson A: It‟s my time! – I listen to music
- Pages: 104-105
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you and other people do in their leisure time.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they and other people do
in their leisure time through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up &
greets back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 5. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 6. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Draws a picture of an Warmer/Review (12 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
elephant on the board. Warmer: „Disappearing an elephant‟ question if they have any.
2. Choose a word (e.g. shoes,
socks, a shirt, a skirt).
3. Writes a line for each letter
on the board.
4. Asks a student to guess a letter.
5. If the letter is in the word, writes
it in the correct space.
6. If the letter is not in the word,
writes it elsewhere on the board
and erases one part of the
elephant (i.e. begin with the
trunk, then the eye, then the
mouth, etc.)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 243

7. Repeats steps 4-6 until students
have guessed the word.
8. Puts students into groups of 5/6.
9. In groups, students play the - Play the game.
game. They take it in turns to
draw the elephant and lets other
students guess.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (43 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: It‟s my time! – I listen
to music

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the pictures.

pictures of Bopha and Lead in and students guess
Sophal‟s room.
2. Tells students to guess who does - Guess.
what using the pictures as clues
in pairs.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Collect some ideas from the - Share ideas.
class.

1. Tells students to listen and Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen & check.

check if their guesses were right. Students listen for the big idea
Asks Did you guess right?
2. Tells students to listen again and - Listen again & find the clues.
find the clues in the picture.
3. Stops recording after each
sentence.
4. Asks some students to point - Point to where the clues are
where the clues are in the in the picture.
picture.
5. Tells students to listen again and - Listen & repeat.
repeat. Tells them to point to the
clues in the picture as they listen.

1. Tells students to work in pairs Activity 3: (5 min) - Work in pairs to tell each other
and tells each other what they Speaking what they do.
do, using vocabulary.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

1. Tells students to complete the Activity 4: (7 mins) - Complete the exercises in the
exercises in the grammar box. Grammar box grammar box.
2. Asks questions to help students
(e.g. Do you we use „s‟ with
„you‟?).
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 244
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 245
4. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers with their
partners/groups.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Writes one sentence on the board Activity 5: (7 mins) - Look at the sentences on the
that is true about one member of Writing board.
your family (e.g. My sister
walks the dog.).
2. Writes one more sentence that is
not true about this member of
your family (e.g. She plays
football.).
3. Tells students to guess which is - Think & guess.
right and wrong.
4. Have a class vote. How many - Have a class vote!
students think your sister walks
the dog? How many students
think she plays football? Writes
the number on the board.
5. Tells students which is right - Get the real answer.
and wrong.
6. Tells students that they are going - Do the same!
to do the same. They will write
true and not true sentences about
a member of their family.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions. Gives a 5 mins limit.

1. Puts students in groups of 5/6. Activity 6: (8 mins) - Work in groups of 5/6.

2. Tells students to take it in turns Guessing game – speaking - Take turns to read their
to read their sentences. Other sentences & other say
students say “Yes, that‟s right” „Yes, that‟s right or No,
or “No, that‟s not right”. that‟s not right‟.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
limit.

1. Tells students to work in pairs. Activity 7: (10 mins) - Work in pairs.

2. Tells students to ask and Speaking and writing - Ask & answer.
answer questions.
3. Tells students to complete the - Complete the table.
table in their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell you Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell what they do after school/on
what they do after school/on the up (2 mins) the weekend.
weekend.
2. Asks some students to tell you - Tell what their friends do
what their friends do after after school/on the weekend.
school/on the weekend.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 246
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 247
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they usually do in the free homework.
time.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 17 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 248

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 17: It‟s my time!
- Lesson B: It‟s my time! – I do nothing
- Pages: 106-107
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you and other people do in their leisure time.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they and other people
do in their leisure time through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor

- How many students are reports students who are absent
absent today? today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice

- Which group is in charge of 3. Individual/ class monitor reports
cleaning the class today? the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today.
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date:
the whiteboard: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
- What day is it today?
- What is the date? - Today is:
- The date is:
Step II:
1. Writes 5 sentences on a piece of Warmer/Review (12 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
paper (e.g. Dara can play the Warmer: „Walking dictation‟ question if they have any.
guitar, She can sig a song, He
writes a diary, etc.).
2. Puts students into groups.
3. The teams stand at one end of
the classroom.
4. Puts the piece of paper with the
sentences at the other end of the
classroom.
5. One student from each team
WALKS as fast as possible to
the paper, memorises a sentence,
returns to his/her team, and say
the sentence. Do not let them

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 249

 run!
6. One student from each team
writes the sentence.
7. Another student from each
team takes their turn to walk to
the paper, memorise a sentence
and say the sentence in their
teams. - Play the game.
8. Continue until one of the teams
has completed writing all the
sentences.
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (28 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: It‟s my time! – I do
nothing

1. Points to the picture of Mr. Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the picture of Mr.
Sovann. Lead in and students guess Sovann.
2. Asks students if they remember - Answer.
who he is (the school principal).
3. Asks: What does he do when he - Answer.
isn‟t at school?
4. Tells students to guess with their - Guess.
partner.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to read about what Dara Students read for the big idea
and Pisey
2. Tells students to read quickly. It - Read.
doesn‟t matter if they don‟t
understand every word. They
only need to understand the main
idea.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students to read the Activity 3: (5 min) - Read the sentences & write the
sentences and write the names. Students read for the answers names.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Check answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Says a sentence (e.g. I play Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
football). Game – sentence relay questions if they have
2. Have another student say your any.
sentence and add his/her own
sentence (e.g. Teacher Mom
plays football, Sophal draws
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 250
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 251
 cartoons and I go for a walk).
3. Tells students they are going to
play the same game in their big
groups.
4. Tells them they can‟t
write. They have to
remember the sentences
without writing.
5. Puts students into 2 big groups.
6. Puts them in a circle. - Play the game.
7. Students take turns to say a
sentence, one sentence building
from the other, until the last
student has said everybody‟s
sentence.
Activity 5: (3 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Speaking
partner. - Student A turn to page 232 &
2. Tells student A to turn to page student B turns to page 238.
232. Tells student B to turn to
page 238. Tells them not to look
at each other‟s timetable. - Ask & answer.
3. Tells them to ask and answer
questions about Dara and
Sophal‟s timetable. - Tick the correct columns.
4. Tells them to tick the
correct columns.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Answer.
6. Asks some questions about the
timetable.
Activity 6: (5 mins) - Use timetable to write about
1. Tells students to use the Writing Dara & Sophal.
timetable to write about Dara
and Sophal.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4.
Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell you Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell what Dara & Sophal do.
what Dara and Sophal do. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they usually do in the free homework.
time.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 17 on page 207 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 252

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 253
Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 254

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 17: It‟s my time!
- Lesson C: It‟s my time! – We play games
- Pages: 108-109
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you and other people do in their leisure time.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they and other people
do in their leisure time through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor

- How many students are reports students who are absent
absent today? today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice

- Which group is in charge of 3. Individual/ class monitor reports
cleaning the class today? the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today.
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date:
the whiteboard: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
- What day is it today?
- What is the date? - Today is:
- The date is:
Step II:
1. Writes a letter on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
(e.g. h). Warmer: „Beginning letter‟ question if they have any.
2. Tells students to think of words
that start with the letter written
on the board (e.g. house, hat,
high, etc.)
3. Writes the words on the board
as students call them out.
4. Puts students into groups of 4/5.
5. Write another letter on the
board.
6. Students write down words
beginning with the letter on the
board in their notebooks.
7. Assign a „writer‟ in each team.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 255

8. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds
per letter.
9. The team with the most words - Play the game.
wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (40 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: It‟s my time! – We play
games

1. Tells students they are going Activity 1: (15 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
to play a game of snakes and Speaking – snakes and ladders questions if they have
ladders. any.
2. Draws a snake and a ladder on
the board.
3. Tells students that snake means
„go down‟ and ladder means „go
up‟.
4. Puts students in groups of 3/4.
5. Each student uses a counter.
6. Use dice to play the game. If
there are no dice, two students in
the group do rock, scissors and
paper. Whoever wins chooses a
number between 1 &6 for the
next player.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions.
8. Stops the students after 13 mins.
- Play the game.
1. Writes some free time activities Activity 2: (10 mins)
on the board (e.g. collect Writing - Look at the board.
stickers, play football, play the
guitar).
2. Asks some students which of
these 3 they like best. - Respond.
3. Number it 1.
4. Asks some students which they
like next. Number it 2.
5. Asks some students which they
like last. Number it 3.
6. Tells students they are going
to write 5 free time activities. - Writes 5 free time activities.
7. Number 1 is the one they like
best, number 5 is the one they
like the last / they don‟t like.
8. Tells students to write in their
notebooks.
9. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 256

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 257
1. Tells students to work in pairs. Activity 3: (10 min) - Work in pairs.
2. Tells students to take it in turns Speaking and writing - Ask & answer.
to ask and answer questions
about their partners.
3. Tells them to write their - Write answers in notebooks.
classmate‟s answers in their
notebooks in the right order.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

1. Tells students to swap Activity 4: (5 mins) - Swap the notebook.

notebooks. Peer correction
2. Tells students to look at the - Look at the checklist.
checklist in their books.
3. Tells students to answer yes or - Answer yes or no & collect
no, then collect their partner‟s their partner‟s mistakes.
mistakes in their partner‟s
sentences.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about what I do in my free - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel time.
about the can do statements. I can ask about what my friends do - Show the feeling.
in their free time.
I can find and check for mistakes in
the sentences.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about why Homework: - Listen and take note of the
they like playing games. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 18 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye!

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 258

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 18: I like my friends!
- Lesson A: I like my friends! – What do you like?
- Pages: 110-111
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about activities you and your friends like and don‟t like.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce activities they and their
friends like and don‟t like through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor

- How many students are reports students who are absent
absent today? today.

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice

- Which group is in charge of 3. Individual/ class monitor reports
cleaning the class today? the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today.
4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date:
the whiteboard: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
- What day is it today?
- What is the date? - Today is:
- The date is:
Step II:
1. Writes 3 numbers on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
about you (e.g. 3 – you have 3 Warmer: „Number and me!‟ question if they have any.
sisters, 2- speak 2 languages, 4 –
you have 4 children).
2. Tells students about the first
number. Asks: what number is
it? (3). Yes, that‟s right. 3. I
have 3 sisters.
3. Lets students guess what the
other numbers are about in
pairs/groups.
4. You can tell them what the
numbers are, or say it‟s a
secret for now. They can ask
you just before the class ends.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 259

5. Puts students into groups of 5/6.
6. Tells students they are going
to play the same game in their
small groups.
7. Each student writes 5 numbers
about him/her.
8. Students take it turns to guess
what their group mates‟
numbers are.
9. Students answer with yes, - Play the game.
that‟s right/no, that‟s not right.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: I like my friends! – What
do you like?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the pictures & talk to
pictures and talk to their New words their partners.
partners. Do they know the
words? students guess.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.
5. Tells students to work with a
partner.
6. In pairs, students look for the - Look for the words in
words in the picture. the picture.
7. Tells students to match the - Match the words with
words with the pictures. the pictures.
8. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
9. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students to close their Lead in: (5 mins) - Close the books & look at the
books and look at the board. board.
2. Writes 3 words on the board
from activity 1(e.g. camping,
rollerblading, playing football).
3. Says: I like hiking.
4. Draws a smiley face beside I
like hiking.
5. Says: I don‟t like rollerblading.
6. Draws a sad face beside I
don‟t like rollerblading.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 260

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 261
1. Tells students to open their Activity 2: (3 mins) - Open the books.
books. Students guess
2. Tells students to look at the - Look at the picture of teacher
picture of teacher Mom. Who is Mom.
she? Can they remember?
3. Tells students to guess what - Guess.
teacher Mom likes/doesn‟t
like. - Work in pairs.
4. In pairs, students put a smiley or
sad face beside the words in
activity 1. They can also write
their answers in their notebooks.
5. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.
Activity 3: (3 min) - Listen & check.
1. Tells students to listen and Students listen for the big idea
check their guesses.
2. Asks: How many of your
guesses were right?
Activity 4: (5 mins) - Look at the pictures & answers.
1. Tells students to look at the Students listen for the answers
pictures. What are they? - Listen & draw.
2. Tells students to listen again and
draw a smiley or sad face. - Check answers.
3. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 5: (5 mins) - Look at the words & pictures.
1. Tells students to look at the Speaking
words & pictures in activity
1.
2. Which do they like? Which - Write 1-8 in notebooks.
don‟t they like?
3. Tells students to write numbers - Draw.
1-8 in their notebooks.
4. Tell them to draw a smiley or
sad face next to each - Ask & answer.
number.
5. Lets students work in pairs.
6. In pairs, students ask and
answer questions.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit Activity 6: (15 mins) - Write 5 sentences
of 4 mins. Writing and speaking about themselves.

1. Tells students to writes 5

sentences about themselves –
what they like and don‟t like
(e.g. I like ice-cream)
2. Students write a piece of paper.
Do not let them write in their
notebooks.
3. Gives students 5 mins.
4. Then collect all the pieces of
paper.
5. Tells students you are going to
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 262
 give them paper, but it‟s not
their paper.
6. Gives students paper, if they get

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 263

 their own paper, tells students to
let you know who can change
their paper.
7. Tells students that they need to
find the person whose paper they
have.
8. Tells students to find the person
who wrote on the paper by
asking questions.
9. Students go around and ask.
Tells students not to show
the paper they‟re holding
when asking questions.
10. When students find the right
person, they sit down.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students what they Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell what they like.
like. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they like/don‟t like. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 18 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 264

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 18: I like my friends!
- Lesson B: I like my friends! – Who likes sleeping?
- Pages: 112-113
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about activities you and your friends like and don‟t like.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce activities they and
their friends like and don‟t like through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students in to 3 teams. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Puts a chair in front of the Warmer: „Back to the board‟ question if they have any.
whiteboard.
3. One student from team A comes
and sits on the chair. He/She
must not look at the board.
4. Writes a word on the board
(e.g. pencil, school, football,
bag, badminton).
5. Other students from team A act
out the word. They mustn‟t
talk.
6. The student in front of the board
must guess the word. The other
teams cannot guess. They have

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 265

 to wait for their turn.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 266

7. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds
for each word.
8. When student in front of the
board guesses correctly, the
team gets a point.
9. Continues playing with the other
teams, writing a different word
each time.
10. The team with the most number - Play the game.
of points at the end of the game
wins.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (41 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: I like my friends! – Who
likes sleeping?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the pictures of the
pictures of the characters. Lead in and students guess characters.
2. Asks: Who are they? What do - Answers.
they like? What don‟t they
like? - Guess.
3. In pairs, students guess what the
characters like and don‟t like.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Tells their guesses.
5. Asks some students to tell you
their guesses.
Activity 2: (3 mins) - Read the text.
1. Tells students to read the text Students read for the big idea
quickly. They don‟t have to
understand ALL the words.
2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.
3. Asks: Did you guess right?
Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen & answer.
1. Tells students to read again and Students read for the answers
answer the questions in their
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Gives a time limit of 3 mins. - Compare answers.
4. Tells students to compare their
answers with their
partners/groups. - Check answers.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (10 mins) - Complete the exercises.
1. Tells students to complete the Grammar box
exercises in the grammar box. - Think/guess the rules.
2. Lets students guess / think about
the rules.
3. Asks question to help students
(e.g. Do we use „s‟ with „you‟?)
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 267
4. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 268

 questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers with their
partners/groups.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Tells students to choose 3 words Activity 5: (10 mins) - Choose 3 words from
from today‟s lesson. Speaking and writing today‟s lesson.
2. Tells students to add 2 more - Add 2 more words.
words (e.g. egg, red, blue,
pencil, etc.)
3. Tells students draw a table in - Draw a table.
their notebooks, similar to the
example.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
5. Tells students to go around. - Ask & answer.
They ask and answer the
questions.
6. Tells students they can only
ask 2 questions for 1 student.
7. Students complete their tables. - Complete the table.
8. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

1. Tells students write about their Activity 6: (10 mins) - Write about their classmates.
classmates in their notebooks. Writing
2. They use the information in their - Use the information in the tables
tables to write. to write.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students what their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell what their friends
friends like/don‟t like. up (2 mins) like/don‟t like.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what their parents like/don‟t homework.
like. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 18 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 269

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 270

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 6: My life after school
- Unit 18: I like my friends!
- Lesson C: I like my friends! – I think he likes my food!
- Pages: 114-115
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about activities you and your friends like and don‟t like.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce activities they and
their friends like and don‟t like through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes one sentence on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
that is true about you (e.g. I like Warmer: „Tell me the truth‟ question if they have any.
going for a walk).
2. Students guess if this is true or
not true. Asks questions (e.g. Is
this right? Do you like going
for a walk?).
3. Writes another sentence that is
not true about you (e.g. I have
10 sisters and 5 brothers).
4. Students guess if this is true or
not. Asks questions (Is this
right? Do I have 10 sisters and 5
brothers?)
5. Tells students they are going to

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 271

 play the same game.
6. Puts students into groups 5/6.
7. Each group writes 3 sentences
about students from the other
teams. They cannot write about
their group mates.
8. Students in each group take it in
turns to read their sentences, one
at a time.
9. The student being referred to say
yes, that‟s right or no, that‟s not
right.
10. Tells students that the game is
about the truth. They should tell
the truth and be honest to make
the game work.
11. Gives points for groups that - Play the game.
wrote correct sentences about
their classmates.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (38 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: I like my friends! – I
think he likes my food!

1. Points to the picture of Avorng. Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture of Avorng.
2. Asks: Who is he? What does he Lead in and students guess - Answer.
like? What does he not like?
3. Tells students to guess what - Guess.
Avorng like and doesn‟t
like with their partners.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Asks some students what their - Tell their guesses.
guesses are.

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 2: (5 mins) - Read the text.
quickly. Students read for the big idea
2. Gives a time limit of 3 mins.
3. Asks: Who do you think is - Respond.
correct? Dara or Sophal?
Why? - Compare answers.
4. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partners. - Share ideas.
5. Collects some ideas from the
class.
Activity 3: (5 min) - Read & answer.
1. Tells students to read again and Students read for the answers
answer the questions in
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Compare answers.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 272
3. Tells students to compare their

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 273

 answers with their
partners/groups.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check answers.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen.

listen to Avorng. Students listen for the answers - Respond.
2. Asks: What does he like? What - Respond.
doesn‟t he like?
3. Ask: Who is correct? Dara or
Sophal?

1. Asks students about their pets Activity 5: (10 mins) - Respond.

(Do they have pets? What are Writing
they? What does it take? What
can it do?
2. Tells students they are going - Write about their pets.
to write about their pets.
3. If they do not have pets, they
can write about pets they would
like to have.
4. Students draws pictures of their - Draw pictures of pets.
pets (or pets they would like to
have) if there is enough time.
Students can also do this for
homework if there isn‟t
enough time.
5. Gives a time limit of 8 mins. - Answers.

1. Puts students in pairs or Activity 6: (10 mins) - Work in pairs/groups of 3.

groups of 3. Speaking
2. Tells students to ask and - Ask & answer.
answer questions about their
pets.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about what I like. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can talk about what my friends
about the can do statements. like/don‟t like. - Show the feeling.
I can ask about what my friends
like/don‟t like.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what their sister/brother homework.
like/don‟t like.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 19 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 274
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 275
Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 276

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 19: Guesses tricks and presents!
- Lesson A: Guesses tricks and presents! – Oh yuck!
- Pages: 116-117
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing and identifying things around you.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and identify things
around them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes ghost house on the board. Warmer/Review (4 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
Asks students if they know what Lead in question if they have any.
it is.
2. Tells students to guess in their
groups. (This is a ride at
dreamland in Phnom Penh. You
go inside and people scare you.)
3. Gets answers as a class. Tells - Play the game.
students that the ghost house is a
game you can play in Phnom
Penh where people try to scare
you!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 277

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (43 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: Guesses tricks and
presents! – Oh yuck!

1. Tells students that Sophal is Activity 1: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

trying to scare Linda. Students guess
2. Asks students to look at the - Look at the picture.
picture. What can they see?
3. Asks students: What is the trick? - Answer.
What is Sophal doing?
4. Students compare with their - Compare ideas.
partner for a minute.
5. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Students listen for the big idea: - Listen carefully.
going to listen and check their (5 mins)
guesses. - Listen.
2. Students listen. - Compare.
3. Students compare with their - Check.
partner/group.
4. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. (recording part 1) - Write a-g in notebooks.
2. Tells students to write a-g in
their notebooks. Asks students to
see if they can remember the
things that were said.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen & tick.
4. Students listen and tick the body
parts they hear. - Compare.
5. Students compare with their - Ask & answer.
partner/group.
6. Ask and answer as a class.
Activity 3: (10 min) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. (recording part 2) - Write 1-5 in notebook.
2. Tells students to write 1-5 in
their notebooks. Tells students to
try and remember/guess the
order. - Listen & write answers.
3. Tells students to listen and write
the answers next to the numbers
in their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen.
5. Students listen. - Compare.
6. Students compare.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 278
7. Plays the recording again only if

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 279

 students need.

1. Asks students if they can Activity 4: (5 mins) - Complete with this, that, these
remember what was said. Tells and those.
students to complete with this,
that, these and those.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Students compare. - Compare.
4. Students listen and check. - Listen & check.
5. Students listen and repeat. - Listen & repeat.

1. Tells students you are going Activity 5: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

to play a guessing game. Game! What‟s
2. Models the game with a student. this? - Model the game.
(tells them to close their eyes.
Gives them an object that they
know the name of. Asks what‟s
this? It‟s a pen!
3. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Points to something in the room - Tell what colour is.

and ask students what colour is Activity 6: (5 mins)
that? Students: That is . What colour?
Repeat with this, these, that and
those.
2. Tells students to play the game - Play the game.
in groups
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks questions to the class with Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Answer with: this, that, these,
this, that, these and those. up (3 mins) those.
2. Ask other students to “play
teacher” and do the same.
3. Are students using words
correctly?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
presents they gave to their homework.
friends.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 19 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 280

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 281

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 19: Guesses tricks and presents!
- Lesson B: Guesses tricks and presents! – That‟s my present!
- Pages: 118-119
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing and identifying things around you.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and identify things
around them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes some first meeting Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
vocabulary on the board. E.g. Warmer: „feeling greetings‟ question if they have any.
Hi. How are you? How are you?
What‟s your name?
2. Tells students to stand up.
3. Tells students that they are going
to do a get to know you role
play.
4. Have the students do the activity
once normally.
5. Tells students to choose a - Play the game.
different partner, but this time
they have found out that their
boyfriend/girlfriend has a
different boyfriend/girlfriend!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 282

 How do they feel? Tells students
to have conversation with this
feeling.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (44 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson B: Guesses tricks and
presents! – That‟s my present!

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture & cover
picture and cover the text. Asks: Students guess the text.
What can you see?
2. Asks students How do they fee? - Respond.
3. Asks students why?
4. Students compare with their - Work with a partner.
partner for 2 mins.
5. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students they are going to Students read and listen for the big - Listen carefully.
read and listen and check their idea: (5 mins)
guesses.
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the recording.
4. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare answers.
answers with their
partner/group. - Check answers.
6. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 2: (10 mins) - Do the first question.
1. Do the first question together as Students read for the answers
a class. Have students point to
where the answer is in the text. - Do the other questions.
2. Tells students to do the other
questions in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Complete.
4. Students complete. - Compare.
5. Students compare. - Check.
6. Checks answers.
Activity 3: (5 min) - Look at the grammar box.
1. Asks students to look at Grammar
the grammar box. - Respond.
2. Writes 1. I. asks students which
word goes with I. students – My! - Answer questions.
3. Tells students to continue
answering the questions in their
notebooks. If students get stuck,
tells them to check the reading.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 283
4. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 284

 questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Ask and answer questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Tells students to look at the text. Activity 4: (3 mins) - Look at the text & answer.
Asks What‟s Linda‟s favourite Model for writing
thing?
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
4. Ask and answer questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Tells students to answer the Activity 5: (4 mins) - Answer.

question in Activity 5 in their Model for writing
notebook. Tells students to use
notes only. Not full sentences.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students compare their answers - Compare.
with their group/partner.
4. Ask and answer questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Students make notes about their Activity 6 and 7: (10 mins) - Make notes about their favourite
favourite thing. Writing thing.
2. Tells students to use their notes - Use their notes to write about
to write about their favourite their favourite thing.
thing. They can follow the
model of Linda‟s writing „My
favourite thing‟.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

1. Tells students to read their Activity 8: (5 mins) - Read their sentences out.
sentences out to their group one Guessing game!
by one. Can their group guess
what their favourite thing is?
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.

Step IV:
1. Asks a couple of students to talk Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Talk about their favourite things.
about their favourite things in up (5 mins)
front of the class. Can the class
guess?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 285

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 286
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their favourite things and homework.
why. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 19 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 287

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 19: Guesses tricks and presents!
- Lesson C: Guesses tricks and presents! – A special present
- Pages: 120-121
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing and identifying things around you.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and identify things
around them through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks students to talk to their Warmer/Review (3 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
group about things people get as Lead in: question if they have any.
presents. Who gives people
presents? When do you get
presents?
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Comes back together as a class - Play the game.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Asks students to look at Students guess: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they
see? - Answer.
2. Asks students What is

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 288

 happening? Why is Dara

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 289

 smiling?
3. Students compare with their - Compare.
partner.
4. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (42 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson C: Guesses tricks and
presents! – A special present

1. Tells students that they are Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses. - Listen.
2. Students listen. - Compare.
3. Students compare with their - Check.
partner/group.
4. Checks answers as a class.
1. Tells students to work with a Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
partner. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students to write 1-7 in - Write 1-7 in notebooks.
their notebooks. Asks students
what they can remember. What
do you think the present from
the cat is?
3. Tells them to listen to cross out - Cross out.
the numbers of thing it can‟t
be.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen.
5. Students listen. - Compare.
6. Students compare their answers
with their group/partner. - Share answers.
7. Asks for some answers as a
class.
1. Tells students to talk to their Activity 3: (5 min) - Talk about anything it could be.
group/partner about anything Post task
else they think it could be.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.
Do the ideas match the clues?
Have a class talk. (e.g. a cow!
No! A cow is bigger than a cat!
Socks. No! You can wear socks)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 290

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (2 mins) - Look at the picture on page 232.
picture on page 232. Did they Confirm guess
guess right?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 291

1. Tells students to read the riddle Activity 5: (10 mins) - Read the riddle in activity 5.
in Activity 5. Can they guess Write a riddle – preparing for
what it is? (you can use it at speaking
school. It is black. It is smaller
than a bird. What is it? A pen!)
2. Tells students to choose one - Choose on thing in English word
thing. It can be something in the (riddle).
classroom or at home, as long
as they know the word in
English!
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Read their riddles.
4. Tells students to work in group
of 4/5 and read their riddles. Can
their friend guess?
Activity 6 (10 mins) - Look at the picture & guess.
1. Tells students to look at the Game!
picture. Asks students ask a yes
no question to try and guess the
picture. When students guess the
object, tells them how many
points they got. - Work with a partner to ask
2. Tells students to work with their yes no questions to find out
partner and to play a game! which object they‟re thinking
Tells students that they need to of.
ask yes no questions to find out
which object they are thinking
of.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about my favourite thing. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can play guessing games. - Show the feeling.
about the can do statements.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
presents they want to give to homework.
their parents and why.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 20 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 292

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 293

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 20: Festivals, parties and trouble!
- Lesson A: Festivals, parties and trouble! – Khmer New Year at Angkor Wat
- Pages: 122-123
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what‟s happening now and what you and your friends are doing now.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what‟s happening now
and what they and their friends are doing now through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 294

 Step II:
1. Writes: Khmer New Year on the Warmer/Review (2 mins) - Talk about what they do on
board. Lead in: Khmer New Year.
2. Asks students to talk to their
group about what they do on
Khmer New Year.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 295

1. Elicits & writes the title of new Step III: - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Introducing New Lesson (45 mins)
What is the title about? Lesson A: Festivals, parties and
trouble! – Khmer New Year at
Angkor Wat

1. Asks students to look at Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they Students guess
see? - Respond.
2. Asks students what is
happening? - Compare.
3. Students compare with their
partner for a minute. - Share ideas.
4. Comes back together as a class
and gets some different ideas.
Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Students listen for the big idea
going to listen and check their - Listen.
guesses. - Compare.
2. Students listen.
3. Students compare with their - Check.
partner/group.
4. Checks answers as a class. Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
Students listen for the answers
1. Tells students to work with a - Write 1-7 in notebooks.
partner.
2. Tells students to write 1-7 in
their notebooks. Tells students to
try and remember/guess the - Listen & write answers next to
order. the numbers.
3. Tells them to listen and write the
answers next to the numbers in
their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Listen.
of 3 mins. - Compare.
5. Students listen. - Share answers.
6. Students compare.
7. Asks for some answers as a
class. Activity 3: (7 min) - Complete the exercises.
Controlled practice
1. Tells students to complete the
exercises.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a 5 mins
time limit. While students are
doing this, starts writing: We - Think about the rules.
are acting on the board.
3. Lets students think about the - Compare answers.
rules of present continuous.
4. Students compare their answers - Answer.
with their partner.
5. Asks and answers questions as a - Answer.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 296
 class.
6. Asks questions to help students:

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 297

 Do we use am/is/are +ing to talk
about things that are finished or
things that are not finished?

1. Have students close their books Activity 4: (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
and stand up. Disappearing Chant questions if they have
2. Tells students that they are any.
going to learn: We are acting.
3. Plays the tape and encourage
students to join in.
4. Tells students that they are
going to sing the song again and
this time they will do the actions
as well.
5. Plays the song.
6. Tells students that they are
going to play a memory game
and that you (teacher) are going
to erase an action word. When
students get to that word, they
don‟t say the word they do the
action only.
7. Erases walking. Sing the song - Play the game.
together. Continue with the rest
of the words!
Activity 5: (10 mins)
1. Chooses one of the pictures in Game! What are you doing? - Guess.
activity 5 and acts it out for the
class. Asks: What am I doing?
2. Puts students into groups of 4/5.
3. Tells students they are going
to play a guessing game.
4. Rules: if your friends guess,
you get 1 point and they get 1
point. - Play the game.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks a few students to act out Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Act out for the class.
what they are doing for the class. up (3 mins)
Can everyone guess?
2. Are students using the present - Use the present continuous.
continuous in their guesses.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 298

 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
things they prepare before homework.
Khmer New Year Day.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 20 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 299

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 300

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 20: Festivals, parties and trouble!
- Lesson B: Festivals, parties and trouble! – Is he getting in trouble again?
- Pages: 124-125
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what‟s happening now and what you and your friends are doing now.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what‟s happening now
and what they and their friends are doing now through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. This is an acting game. One Warmer/Review (8 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
student stands in front of the Warmer: Game! What are you questions if they have
class doing a continuous doing? any.
ing acting. (e.g. fishing)
2. Student 2 comes and asks what
are you doing?
3. Student 1 doesn‟t say I am
fishing. They say a different
ing action. I‟m flying!
4. Student 2 has to do the action
student 1 said. (e.g. flying)
5. Student 2 keeps pretending to fly
until student 3 asks What are
you doing? Student 2 doesn‟t
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 301
 say flying. They say a different
ing

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 302

 action.
6. Continues until all students have - Play the game.
had a turn. It‟s really funny! (if
you have a very large class, just
point to some people. )

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Festivals, parties and
What is the title about? trouble! – Is he getting in trouble
again?

1. Tells students to cover the text Activity 1: (3 mins) - Cover the text & the picture
and the picture that goes with it Lead in & look at the 3 words.
and look at the 3 words and the
pictures. Drills the words!
2. Tells students today‟s story - Guess the story.
uses these words. Can they
guess the story?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 2: (5 mins) - Look at the picture & cover the
picture and cover the text. What Students guess text.
can they see?
2. Asks: What are you doing? - Respond.
3. Asks students: What festival do - Respond.
you think they are at?
4. Students compare with their - Compare.
partner.
5. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students they are going Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen carefully and raise
to listen and read and check Students read and listen for the big questions if they have
their guesses. idea any.
2. Tells students to read along
with their fingers. - Listen carefully.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the
recording!
4. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers.
5. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.
Activity 4: (10 mins)
1. Do the first question together as Students read for the answers - Do the first question as a class.
a class. Have students point to
where the answer is in the text.
2. Tells students to do the other - Do the other questions.
questions in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 303
 questions and gives a time limit

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 304

 of 5 mins.
4. Students complete. *sets up the - Complete.
next activity on the board while
they are doing this.
5. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.
1. (Do this while students are Activity 5: (6 mins)
reading for answers in activity 4) Controlled practice
draws 3 columns on the board
and draws this from the students‟
book on the board.
No e! Double letters! Just add ing!
Make-making Swim- Read- reading
Have-having swimming Jump-jumping
Sit- siting
2. Asks students where you should
write the word: write - Answer.
3. Tells students to draw 3 columns
in their notebooks and write the - Draw 3 columns.
ing words in the columns.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
5. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Compare.
6. Asks and answers as a class.
- Share answers.
1. Asks students to look at Activity 6: (2 mins)
the picture. What can they Brainstorming - Look at the picture.
see?
2. Asks students: how many words - Respond.
do you know in the picture?
3. Students compare with their - Compare.
partner.
4. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Writes a sentence from the Activity 7: (9 mins) - Look at the sentence on the
picture on the board. Game! board.
2. Tells students to work by
- Write ing sentences about the
themselves to write ing
sentences about the picture. picture.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
4. At the end of the time clap your
hands and says Pen down!
5. Students compare with their
group. - Compare.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 305

 Step IV:
1. Asks groups who was the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
winner in their group. up (2 mins)
2. Asks about the winning - Respond.
sentences. Calls on both weaker
and stronger students.
3. Are student using the
correct form of „to be‟?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about how Homework: - Listen and take note of the
they do when they have stress. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 20 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 306

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 20: Festivals, parties and trouble!
- Lesson C: Festivals, parties and trouble! – A beautiful wedding
- Pages: 126-127
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what‟s happening now and what you and your friends are doing now.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what‟s happening now
and what they and their friends are doing now through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 307

 Step II:
1. Tells all students to stand up. Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Puts class into 4 groups. Warmer: Game! questions if they have
3. Tells students to decide on a any.
team name.
4. Writes the team names on the
board.
5. Have one student from each
group go to the board and face
the class so they cannot see the
board.
6. Writes present continuous words
on the board. (e.g. dancing).
Tells the students facing the rest
of the class Guess the word.
They have to look at the actions

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 308

 the rest of their group is doing to
guess! If no one has guessed it
after a minute, tells them to look
at the board. Changes the people
at the front of the class after each
ing word.
7. Rules: the people at the board
can talk. The people trying to act
and show the word are not
allowed to talk. First team to
guess gets a point.
8. People who cheat lost a point.
9. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Play the game.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: Festivals, parties and
What is the title about? trouble! – A beautiful wedding

1. Asks students to look at Activity 1: (4 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they Students guess
see? - Answer.
2. Asks students what is
happening? Where are - Guess.
they?
3. Tells students: These are people
in Sophal‟s family. Can you - Compare.
guess who they are?
4. Students compare with their - Share ideas.
partner for 3 mins.
5. Comes back together as a class
and gets some different ideas. Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
Students listen for the big idea
1. Tells students that they are going - Listen.
to listen and check their guesses. - Compare.
2. Students listen. - Check.
3. Students compare with their
partner/group.
4. Checks answers as a class. Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
Students listen for the answers
1. Tells students to work with a - Write a-g in notebooks.
partner.
2. Tells students to write a-g in
their notebooks. Tells students to
try and remember/guess who the - Listen & write the answers next
people are. to the letters in notebooks.
3. Tells them to listen and write the
answers next to the letters in
their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Listen.
of 3 mins. - Compare.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 309
5. Students listen.
6. Students compare.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 310

7. Asks for some answers as a - Share answers.
class.

1. Tells students to close their Activity 3: (12 min) - Listen carefully and raise
books and look at you. Free controlled practice questions if they have
2. Tells students to work with a any.
partner. Have pairs choose who
is student A and who is student
B.
3. Tells student A‟s to put up
their hands. Tells student B‟s
to put up their hands.
4. Tells students that they are going
to look at 20 pictures. There are
people doing continuous actions
in the pictures. They need to ask
what is the kid doing? questions
to find out which are the same
and which are different. (12 are
the same & 8 are different). Asks
how many the same? How many
different?
5. Tells students that they are not
allowed to look at the
partner‟s picture. They have to
ask questions to find the eight
differences.
6. Gives a time limit of 10 mins.
- Start their work.
1. Describe a student in the room. Activity 4: (4 mins)
(it will be funny if you describe Free practice - Listen carefully.
yourself!) you can say what they
are wearing and what they are
doing. Can the students guess?
2. Tells students to play the same
game in group of 4/5.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Play the game.
of 3 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (4 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can say what I‟m doing. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say what my friends are
about the can do statements. doing. I can ask “What are you - Show the feeling.
doing?” questions.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 311

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 312
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
beautiful wedding. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 21 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 313

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 21: A world of fun
- Lesson A: A world of fun – The new baby
- Pages: 128-129
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what is happening now and what usually happens.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what introduce what is
happening now and what usually happens through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 314

 Step II:
1. Puts students in groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Writes what I like about Warmer: questions if they have
you is…on the board. any.
3. Asks students to help you finish
the sentence about you! (e.g.
What I like about you is you‟re
a good teacher. Or what I like
about you is you‟re funny.
4. Tells students that they are going
to say nice things about each
person in the group for 30
seconds! Students have to finish
the sentence „What I like about
you is…‟ with something true
and good about the person.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 315

 Students then have to guess who
the person is.
5. Tells students you (teacher) are
going to clap your hands at the
end of 30 seconds and they need
to change.
6. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (47 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: A world of fun – The new
What is the title about? baby

1. Puts students into groups of 4. Activity 1: (3 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Asks: Do you know any babies? Lead in - Talk to their groups.
What do they do? Tells students
to talk to their groups.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
4. Asks some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 2: (2 mins) - Look at the picture & respond.
picture. What can they see? Students guess
2. Asks students: What is - Respond.
happening?
3. Asks students: Why? - Respond.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner.
5. Gets some answers from the - Share ideas.
class.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

listen and check their guesses. Students listen for the big idea
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students listen. - Listen.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner/group.
5. Check answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 3: (10 min) - Work with a partner.
partner. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students to try and - Remember/guess.
remember/guess what Dara‟s
family members usually do/are
doing.
3. Tells students to write 3-10 in - Write 3-10 in notebooks.
their notebooks and to write the
information they remember.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 316
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 317
 of 3 mins.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
6. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their group/partner.
7. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Writes 1. Tom usually watch TV Activity 4: (10 mins) - Look at the board & respond.
on Sunday, today he is go for a Controlled practice
walk. Asks: Is that right?
Students: no!
2. Corrects your sentence. (1. Tom - Respond.
usually watch TV on Sunday,
but today he is going for a
walk.) Asks: Is that right?
Students: yes!
3. Tells students to write - Write sentences 2-7 in
sentences 2-7 in their notebooks.
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins. - Compare.
5. Tells students to compare their
answers with their - Ask & answer.
partner/group.
6. Asks and answers questions as a
class. Activity 5: (7 mins) - Listen carefully.
Preparing for speaking
1. Talks about an unusual day.
Gives examples, e.g. - Imagine on their family
birthday, very big storm, having an unusual Sunday.
marriage etc.
2. Tells students to use their
imagination, tells students to
imagine their family is having
an unusual Sunday.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit Activity 6: (10 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
of 3 mins. Freer practice
- Take turns to tell their group
1. Tells students to work in about unusual Sunday.
groups of 4.
2. Tells students to take it in turns
to tell their group about their
unusual Sunday. Group
members have to listen and ask
questions.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 318

 Step IV:
1. Tells some students to tell the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Tell the class about unusual
class about their unusual up (2 mins) Sunday.
Sunday.
2. Are students confident?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 319

 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
new baby. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 21 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 320

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 21: A world of fun
- Lesson B: A world of fun – There‟s something about the moon
- Pages: 130-131
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what is happening now and what usually happens.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what introduce what is
happening now and what usually happens through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 321

 Step II:
1. Tells students to stand up and Warmer/Review (8 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
look at the teacher. Warmer: „Sok says‟ questions if they have
2. Says that you will tell them to do any.
things but they should only do if
you say Sok says!
3. There are rules. If a student is
too slow they are dead. If
students do something, but you
didn‟t say Sok says, they are
out.
4. If they don‟t do something, - Play the game.
but you did say Sok says they
are out!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 322

1. Writes: Celebrate! On the board. Lead in: (3 mins) - Look at the board.
2. Asks: What do people celebrate? Brainstorming - Respond.
Gets 1 or 2 ideas from the class.
3. Tells students to keep talking - Talk.
about things people celebrate
with their groups.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Gets answers from the class. - Share ideas.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (32 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: A world of fun –
What is the title about? There‟s something about the moon

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the picture and cover the
picture and cover the text. What Students guess text.
can you see?
2. Asks students: what can you see - Respond.
in the pictures?
3. Asks students: What are they - Respond.
celebrating?
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for 3 mins.
5. Gets some answers from the - Share ideas.
class.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and read and Students read and listen for the big
check their guesses. idea
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the
recording! - Listen & read.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Compare.
5. Students compare their answers
with their group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks the answers as a class.
Activity 3: (5 min) - Respond.
1. Where is Dhashi from? Students: Students read for the answers
Malaysia! Continues with the
rest of the questions about
Dhashi! - Answer.
2. Tells students to answer the
rest of the questions in their
notebooks. Tells students to
make notes.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Compare.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 323
4. Tells students to compare with

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 324

 their group/partner.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students that you are Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

imagining you are one of the Stirrer – Guess Who!
children. Tells students to ask
yes/no ing questions and
guess who you are!
2. Tells students to play the same - Play game.
game with their partner.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students to choose a Activity 5: (5 mins) - Listen carefully & choose

celebration or party (e.g. Students prepare to speak a celebration.
wedding…)
2. Tells students to make notes - Make notes about celebration.
only about their celebration in
their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students they are going Activity 6: (7 mins) - Describe a festival.

to describe their festival to Freer speaking practice
their group. Tells students not
to say which festival it is. Tells
students that you like good
descriptions and creativity! - Listen to the Model!
2. Model! The activity. Tells
students to close their eyes and
try to see what you are
describing. Describes a festival.
Can students guess?
3. Tells students to do the same - Do the same thing (festival).
thing in their group. Asks
instruction checking questions
and gives a time limit of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students to describe Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Describe their festival.
their festival for the class. Can up (2 mins)
the class guess?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
festival they like. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 21 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 325
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 326
Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 327

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 7: Celebrations!
- Unit 21: A world of fun
- Lesson C: A world of fun – What‟s happening?
- Pages: 132-133
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what is happening now and what usually happens.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what introduce what is
happening now and what usually happens through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes What are you doing? On Warmer/Review (6 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
the board. Warmer: „What are you doing?‟ questions if they have
2. Tells students that they are any.
going to play an acting game!
It‟s called “What are you
doing?”
3. Tells one student at a time stands
in front of the class and does a
continuous –ing action and they
can‟t stop until someone asks
them “What are you doing?”.
4. Model! Do a continuous action.
(e.g. fishing.) Pretend to be
fishing. Says to students you
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 328
 keep going and keep going until
someone says? Students: What

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 329

 are you doing? Say: yes! But the
person doesn‟t say fishing.
They say a different action. (e.g.
jumping).
5. Start jumping! Says you keep
going and keeping going until
someone says? Students: What
are you doing? Say: yes! Does
the person say jumping?
Students: no! They say a
different action!
6. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: A world of fun – What‟s
What is the title about? happening?

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture and cover the
picture and cover the text. What Students guess text.
can you see?
2. Asks students: what is everyone - Respond.
doing? Why?
3. Students compare with their - Compare.
partner for a minute.
4. Comes back together as a class - Share ideas.
and gets some different ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and read and Students read and listen for the big
check their guesses. idea
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the
recording! - Listen & read.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Compare.
5. Students compare their answers
with their group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks the answers as a class.
Activity 3: (7 min) - Respond.
1. Asks: Is Mr. Sovann in his Students read for the answers
office? Students: no! tells
students to point to where the
answer is in the text. - Answer the other questions.
2. Tells students to answer the
rest of the questions in their
notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 330
4. Students compare with their

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 331

 group/partner.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Asks: Is Mr. Sovann in his Activity 4: (7 mins) - Respond.

office? Students: no! says: Students read for the answers
Where is Mr. Sovann? Students:
Mr. Sovann is watching the egg.
2. Writes: Mr. Sovann isn‟t in
his office. He‟s watching the - Correct 4 of the rest of the
egg. questions.
3. Tells students to correct 4 of the
rest of the questions (write long
answers) in their notebooks.
They can choose any 4 questions
they like.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare.
5. Tells students to compare
with their group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 5: (5 mins) - Look at the first picture &
1. Tells students to look at the first Looking at the model answer.
picture. Asks: what should she
be doing? Students: She should
be doing homework. Asks: Is
she doing homework? Students:
No, she isn‟t doing homework.
Asks: What is she doing?
Students: She‟s playing - Look at the rest of the cartoons
football. & talk about Neath.
2. Tells students to look at the rest
of the cartoons with their
partner and talk about Neath.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Talk about 2-3 of the pictures.
of 3 mins.
4. Talks about 2 or 3 of the picture
as a class (you don‟t have to do
them all!). Activity 6: (7 mins) - Make their own cartoon.
Personalization
1. Tells students to make their own
cartoon. Tells students to follow
the example in activity 5. Tells
students to draw 2-3 pictures.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. Activity 7: (7 mins) - Work in groups of 4/5.
Speaking - Listen carefully.
1. Puts students in groups of 4/5.
2. Tells students they are going
to play a guessing game with
the pictures.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 332
3. Tells students to take it in turns
to ask –ing questions and make

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 333

 negative statements about the
pictures. They get 1 point for
ever right guessing using the
right grammar.
4. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a patner. I can talk about what usually - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel happen. - Respond.
about the can do statements. I can say what people aren‟t
doing. I can ask questions about
what people aren‟t doing.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what‟s happening today? homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 22 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 334

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 22: Cool things in my country.
- Lesson A: Cool things in my country – What animal is it?
- Pages: 134-135
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Asking and responding to questions.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask & respond to questions through
speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes some first meeting Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
vocabulary on the board. E.g. Warmer: „Feeling greetings‟ questions if they have
Hi. How are you? What‟s your any.
name?
2. Tells students to stand up.
3. Tells students that they are
going to do a get to know you
role play. They greet each other
as if they are meeting for the
first time.
4. Stops after 30 seconds.
5. Tells students to choose a
different partner, but this time
they have just found out their
sister/brother spent/stole all

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 335

 his/her money. Asks: How do
you feel? (angry!) tells students
to have the conversation with
this feeling (angry).
6. Stops after 30 seconds and - Play the game.
change the situation again. Tells
students to change partners too.
Students have the conversation
with different feelings. E.g. your
dog is dead (sad). You have a
million dollars (happy). You
scored 100% in your test!
(happy, surprise). You are going
to the USA (or any other
country) on holiday (happy,
excited).

1. Asks students their favourite Lead in: (3 mins) - Respond.

animals. What other animals do
they know?
2. Puts students in pairs. Students - Talk about animals they like/
talk about animals they like and don‟t like.
don‟t like.
3. Gives a time limit of 1 min.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Cool things in my
What is the title about? country – What animal is it?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the photos.

photos of animals in Activity 1. New words
2. Asks: Which of these animals do - Respond.
you know?
3. Tells students to match the - Match the photos with words.
photos with words in their
notebooks.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partners.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
6. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students that some of these Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

animals live with people. Some Categorizing
live in the forest and seas.
2. Asks students to copy the table - Copy the table in their
in their notebooks quickly. notebooks.
3. Tells students to work in pairs. - Work in pairs & Complete.
They complete the table.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 336
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 337
 Activity 3: (3 min)
1. Tells students they are going Students listen for the big idea - Listen carefully.
to listen about animals.
2. One is NOT an animal. Can they - Guess.
guess? What number? Who is
he?
3. Tells students to listen and - Listen & guess.
guess.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to listen again and Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen & match.
match the questions with the Students listen for the answers
answers.
2. Students write answers in their - Write answers in notebooks.
notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to complete the Activity 5: (7 mins) - Complete the exercises.

exercises in the grammar box in Grammar box
their notebooks.
2. Tells students to think about the - Think about the rules.
rules.
3. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Asks some students about their Activity 6: (8 mins) - Respond.

favourite animals (e.g. What Writing
does it eat?)
2. Tells students they are going - Answer about their favourite
to answer questions about their animals.
favourite animals in their
notebooks.
3. If time, students draw their - Draw their favourite animals.
favourite animals. Sets this for
homework if there isn‟t
enough time.

1. Tells students to work in pairs. Activity 7: (3 mins) - Work in pairs.

2. Tells students to ask and Speaking - Ask & answer about their
answer questions about their favourite animals.
favourite animals.

Step IV:
1. Shows some completed Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Show some completed
pictures of their favourite up (3 mins) pictures of their favourite
animals. animals.
2. Tells students that some of the - Listen & think.
animals are endangered. They
are about to die and we will not
see them ever again.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 338

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 339
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to think of the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
ways to help endangered homework.
animals.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 22 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 340

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 22: Cool things in my country.
- Lesson B: Cool things in my country – Life on the water
- Pages: 136-137
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Asking and responding to questions.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask & respond to questions through
speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into 2-3 groups. Warmer/Review (8 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Have the groups stand in a line Warmer: „Number, draw, race!‟ questions if they have
or sit in a circle. any.
3. The student at the back of the
line starts. If students are seated
in a circle, chooses one student
to start the game off.
4. Shows the students at the end of
the line a number (e.g. 70).
5. The students run to their lines
and write the number on the
back of the student in front of
them with their finger.
6. When the student knows what
the number is, he/she can write

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 341

 the number on the next students
back.
7. Continues until the student at the
front of the line knows the
number. The student shouts it
out or writes it on the board.
8. The first team to shout out / - Play the game.
write the correct number on the
board wins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Cool things in my country
What is the title about? – Life on the water

1. Shows students the photo of a Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the photo.

floating village in Activity 1. Lead in
2. Tells students that this is photo - Listen carefully.
of a floating village. What do
they know about floating
village?
3. Asks questions (e.g. What is it? - Respond.
Who lives here? Would you like
to live here? Why?).

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 2: (5 mins) - Read the text.
quickly. Students read for the big idea
2. Gives a time limit of 3 mins.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Asks: Does Panha like the - Respond.
floating village? Would you like
to line in a floating village?
Why?
5. Asks some students to share - Share ideas.
their ideas in class.

1. Tells students to answer the Activity 3: (10 min) - Answer the questions.
questions. They write answers in Students read for the answers
their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Gives a time limit of 7 mins.
4. Students compare answers with - Compare.
their partners.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 4: (10 mins) - Listen carefully.
write questions about their best Writing
friend.
2. Students complete the questions - Complete & write.
and write choices in their
notebooks.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 342
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 343
3. Tells students they should NOT - NOT to write answers & their
write the answers and they best friend‟s name.
should NOT write their best
friend‟s name.
4. Students write questions in their - Write questions.
notebooks.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.
6. Gives a time limit of 9 mins.

1. Students work in pairs. To make Activity 5: (10 mins) - Work in pairs.

this activity more exciting, you Speaking
might want to pair students up
such that they work with
someone they don‟t usually
work with.
2. A student start by reading - Read his/her quiz to partner.
his/her quiz questions to his/her
partner. - Put a tick as his/her partner
3. She/He puts a tick as his/her answer.
partner answers the questions. - Swap roles.
4. Students swap roles. - Guess.
5. When both students have
finished asking and answering
questions, they count the number
of correct questions their partner
got. Did they guess right?
Step IV:
1. Asks: how many of your Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
answers were correct? up (2 mins)
2. Asks students to guess what - Guess.
your answers would be for the
quiz questions.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to answer: Homework: - Listen and take note of the
„Do you want to live in a homework.
floating village?‟ why or
why not? Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 22 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 344

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 22: Cool things in my country.
- Lesson C: Cool things in my country – Where is it?
- Pages: 138-139
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Asking and responding to questions.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask & respond to questions
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes a word on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
(e.g. small). Warmer: „How many things can questions if they have
2. Asks: what small things can you think of that…?‟ any.
you think of? (e.g. pencil, pen,
rat, paper). Accepts all possible
answers.
3. Tells students they are going
to play the same game in
groups.
4. Puts students in groups of 5/6.
5. Assigns a writer in each group.
6. Asks a question / writes on the
board (e.g. red, square, bigger
than the teacher, yellow).
7. In groups, students write down

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 345

 as many things they can think of

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 346

 that are red, square, bigger than
the teacher, yellow, etc.
8. Gives a time limit of 1 minute
for each word or phrase.
9. The group with the most number - Play the game.
of words wins. Accepts words
that are spelt wrong.

1. Writes Cambodia on the board. Lead in: (3 mins) - Look at the board.
2. Asks students what they know - Respond.
about their country / Cambodia.
3. Asks: Wh- questions (e.g. Where - Respond.
is Angkor Wat? What do you
like about Cambodia?)

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (35 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Cool things in my country
What is the title about? – Where is it?

1. Tells students they are going Activity 1: (12 mins) - Listen carefully.
to answer questions about Cambodia quiz
Cambodia.
2. Tells them to guess the answers - Guess.
if they don‟t know.
3. Puts students in groups of 5/6.
4. Assigns a writer in each team.
The writer writes the answers in
his/her notebook.
5. Students answer the questions - Answer about Cambodia.
about Cambodia.
6. Gives a time limit of 8 mins.
7. Students listen and check their - Listen & check.
answers.

1. Students work in the same Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work in groups.

groups. Writing – more quiz questions
2. Tells students they are going - Write more questions about
to write more questions about Cambodia.
Cambodia.
3. Students write 3 quiz questions. - Write 3 quiz questions.
They must know the answers to
the questions they write!
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 3: (13 min) - Listen carefully.
going to read their questions to Speaking
the other groups.
2. Assigns a reader and a writer - Assign the reader & the writer.
in each team.
3. The reader read the questions - The reader read the questions.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 347
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 348
 and choices one by one.
4. Each group has 30 seconds to
shout out their answers. If other
groups have not given an
answer after 30 seconds, the
reading group wins and gets a
point.
5. The writer adds extra points on
the board.
6. Continues until all 3 questions
have been asked, then calls on
other groups.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the can Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
do statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can ask questions about people, - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel places, animals and things. - Respond.
about the can do statements. I can answer questions about people,
places, animals and things.
I can write questions about my
country.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students write about their Homework: - Listen and take note of the
country / Cambodia. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 23 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 349

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 23: My cool house
- Lesson A: My cool house – Where are my things?
- Pages: 140-141
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your house.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their house through speaking
& writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells them to close their eyes or Warmer: „Classroom quiz‟ questions if they have
cover them with their hands. No any.
cheating / peeping!
3. Asks some questions about the
classroom (e.g. how many chairs
are in the classroom? How many
windows?)
4. Tells students to put up their
hands if they want to
answer.
5. The student who answers right
sits down.
6. Asks questions quickly. - Play the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 350

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: My cool house – Where
What is the title about? are my things?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

photos in activity 1. Lead in
2. Points to a picture (e.g. - Look at the picture.
bedroom). Says: I sleep
here. - Work in pairs.
3. Puts students in pairs. - Talk about what they do in
4. Tells them to talk about what each part of the house.
they do in each part of the house.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Share answers.
6. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Respond.
1. Asks some students if they New words
know what the photos are. - Number the photos & guess
2. Tells students to number the & talk.
photos in their notebooks. Tells
them to guess and talk to their
partner.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Listen & check.
4. Students listen and check. - Listen & repeat.
5. Students listen and repeat.
Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Students listen for the big idea
going to listen to Dara. - Respond.
2. Tells students that Dara is
preparing for school. Asks: Is
it a bad day or a good day for
Dara? - Listen.
3. Plays the recording. - Share ideas.
4. Gets some ideas from students.
Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen & number the pictures.
1. Tells students to listen again and Students listen for the answers
number the pictures in their
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare.
3. Tells students to compare their
answers with their classmates. - Check.
4. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 5: (10 mins) - Complete the exercises.
1. Tells students to complete the Grammar box
exercises in the grammar box. - Think about the rules.
2. Lets students to think about the
rules.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 351
3. Asks questions to help students.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 352

4. Gives a time limit of 7 mins.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to copy the Activity 6: (7 mins) - Copy the drawing in activity 5.
drawing in the activity 5 in their Listen and drawing
notebooks.
2. Tells them to listen and draw. - Listen & draw.
3. Gives a time limit of 30 seconds
for each sentence.
4. Reads these sentences out loud,
one by one. Reads each
sentence 2-3 times.
„Draw a box. Draw a ball in the
box. Draw a pencil next to the box.
Draw a notebook next to the box.
Draw an apple on the notebook.‟ - Answer about Cambodia.

1. Tells students to compare their Activity 7: (4 mins) - Compare their drawing.

drawing. Are they the same or Speaking
different?
2. Tells them to ask and answer - Ask & answer.
questions (e.g. where is the
ball?)
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

Step IV:
1. Shows some good examples of Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Listen carefully.
drawings in activity 7. Tells up (2 mins)
students that their success in this
activity depends on their ability
to listen well. They can‟t do this
by listening and talking at the
same time.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to draw about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their house. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 23 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 353

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 23: My cool house
- Lesson B: My cool house – Big houses, small houses
- Pages: 142-143
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your house.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their house through speaking
& writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Tells students to look at the Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Look at the photos.
photos in activity 1. Activity 1: Lead in
2. Asks students if they have seen - Respond.
houses like these before. Where?
Which of the 2 houses would
they like to live in?
3. Tells students to work with their - Work with a partner & answer.
partners and answer the
questions.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Gets ideas from students. - Share ideas.
Accept all answers!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 354

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: My cool house – Big
What is the title about? houses, small houses

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 2: (5 mins) - Read the text.
quickly. They don‟t need to Students read for the big idea
understand all the words.
2. Tells students to match the texts - Match the texts with the photos.
with the photos.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Checks answers a class. - Check answers.

1. Tells students to read again and Activity 3: (7 min) - Read & answers.
answer the questions in their Students read for the answers
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their partners.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Puts students into groups of 3. Activity 4: (15 mins) - Work in groups of 3.

2. Tells students that they are Writing and drawing
going to draw their dream house. - Draw about dream house.
It‟s the group‟s dream house.
3. Tells students to answer the - Think about where & what their
questions with their ideas first. house would be like.
Students in each group have to
agree about where and what their
house would be like.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 12 mins.

1. Chooses one student from each Activity 5: (11 mins) - Choose a reporter.
team to report about their work. Speaking
2. Calls each reporter in front of - A reporter of each team tells the
the class. Tells them to talk class about their work/dream
about their work for 1 minute. house.
3. Asks the other students to think
of one question for the reporting
team.
4. Displays some of the - Display their work/dream house.
students‟ work.
5. Have a class vote to see which of - Have a class vote!
the house students like best.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 355

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 356
 Step IV:
1. Asks some students which of the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
pictures they like best and why. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
things are in their dream house. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 23 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 357

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 23: My cool house
- Lesson C: My cool house – The coolest room ever!
- Pages: 144-145
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your house.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their house through speaking
& writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes a word on the board. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
Uses the word from this unit Warmer: „Play New words‟ questions if they have
(e.g. bathroom). any.
2. Tells students that some words
can be made from the letters in
the word bathroom (e.g. room,
bath, room, bat, hat)
3. Writes bath on the board. Asks
students if they can make some
more words.
4. Writes the words on the board
as students call them out.
5. Puts students into groups of 3/4.
6. Tells students that they are
going to play the same game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 358

7. Tells students to write the words
in their notebooks.
8. Writes another word on the
board from this unit of previous
ones.
9. Gives a time limit of 1 minute
for each word.
10. Writes the words students make - Play the game.
on the board. Gives points for
each correct word.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: My cool house – The
What is the title about? coolest room ever!

1. Tells students your favourite Activity 1: (7 mins) - Listen carefully.

room in your house (e.g. Lead in
bedroom) and why. Draws on
the board (e.g. bedroom – bed).
Puts students in pairs.
2. Tells students to talk to their - Talk to their partners about parts
partners about the parts of the of the house they like best.
house they like best.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Asks some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen.

going to listen to Dara, Sophal Students listen for the big idea
and Bopha talking about their
favourite place in the house.
2. Tells them to write their names - Write their names in their
in their notebooks. notebooks.
3. Asks: Who likes the same - Respond.
place as you?
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to listen again and Activity 3: (7 min) - Read & complete.
complete the sentences in their Students listen for the answers
notebooks.
2. Tells students NOT to copy - Write only the answers.
the sentences. They write only
the answers in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Checks answers a class. - Check.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 359

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 360
1. Quickly copy the table in Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen carefully.
activity 4 on the board. Speaking – class survey
2. Asks a student: Do you like the - Respond.
living room? Students: yes.
3. Puts a tick next to living room - Put a tick next to living room.
on the table.
4. Puts students into groups of 4/5. - Work in groups of 4/5.
5. Tells students to copy the table - Copy the table.
in their notebooks.
6. Tells students that they are - Ask & answer.
going to ask their group mates
about the rooms in the house
they like best.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Writes this on the board: In my Activity 5: (5 mins) - Look at the board.

group, people like the Writing
living room.
2. Asks some students: How many - Respond.
students in your group like the
living room?
3. Writes the number on the board.
4. Tells students to complete the - Complete.
sentences in their notebooks.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Tells students to make a bar Activity 6: (7 mins) - Make a bar graph.

graph of their results. Writing
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Shows some of - Show some of student‟s work.
student‟s completed
work in class.
4. Tells students to do this for
homework if they haven‟t
finished yet.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (2 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about some rooms in my - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel house. - Respond.
about the can do statements. I can talk about my favourite places
in my house.
I can ask and answer questions
about where some things are in my
house

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 361

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 362
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
things they want to add more to homework.
their house.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 24 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 363

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 24: Cool place in my town
- Lesson A: Cool place in my town – Where is it?
- Pages: 146-147
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about and describing your town.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe their
town through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes a four letter word on the Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
board (e.g. bend). Warmer: „Change the letters‟ questions if they have
2. Tells students that we can make any.
some more words by changing
one letter of this word, one at a
time (e.g. band, bent, tent, bind).
3. Asks students if they can make a
few words by changing one of
the letters, one at a time.
4. Writes the words on the board
as students call them out.
5. Puts students into groups of 4/5.
6. Tells students that they are
going to play the same game.
7. Tells students to choose a writer

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 364

 a speaker in their teams.
8. Writes a three /four letter word
on the board (e.g. cat, bag,
tray, send)
9. The team thinks of words they - Play the game.
can make by changing one of the
letters, one at a time. The writer
writes the words on a piece of
paper.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Cool places in my town
What is the title about? – Where is it?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the photos.

photos in activity 1. Lead in
2. Asks them which of the photos - Respond.
are in their town.
3. Asks them which places are in - Respond.
their towns that are not in the
photos (e.g. pagoda, park). If
students say the words in
Khmer, asks them what the
English words are. Gives them
time to guess before telling them
what the English words are.
4. Tells students to work with their - Work in pairs.
partners.
5. In pairs, students say which of - Respond.
the photos are in their town and
think of other places in their
town that aren‟t in the book.
6. Asks students what places are - Respond.
in their town and which places
are in their town but are not in
the book.

1. Tells students to number the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Number the photos.

photos in their notebooks. New words
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Asks some students what they Activity 2: (6 mins) - Respond.

think Dara‟s favourite place Students listen for the big idea
in town is and why.
2. Have a class vote! (e.g. How - Have a class vote!
many students think Dara‟s
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 365
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 366
 favourite place is the park?
3. Tells students they are going to - Listen to the teacher.
listen to Linda. What does Lind
think Dara‟s favourite place is?
4. Plays the recording. - Listen to the tape.
5. Asks: What does Linda think - Respond.
Dara‟s favourite place is?
6. Tells students that they are - Listen to the teacher.
going to listen to Avorng. What
does Avorng think Dara‟s
favourite place is?
7. Plays the recording. - Listen to the tape.
8. Asks: What does Avorng think - Respond.
Dara‟s favourite place is?
9. Tells students they are going - Listen to the teacher.
to listen to Sophal. What does
Sophal think Dara‟s favourite
place is?
10. Plays the recording. - Listen to the tape.
11. Ask: What does Sophal think - Respond.
Dara‟s favourite place is?
12. Tells students they are going - Listen to the teacher.
to listen to Dara. Who is
correct? - Listen to the tape.
13. Plays the recording. - Respond.
14. Ask: what is Dara‟s
favourite place?
Activity 3: (7 min) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students they are going Students listen for the answers
to listen again. - Complete the table.
2. Tells them to complete the table
in activity 3 in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare.
4. Tells students to compare their
answers with their pairs. - Check.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (5 mins) - Work with their partner.
1. Tells students to work with their Speaking
partner. - Talk about favourite places in
2. In pairs, students talk about their town and why.
favourite places in town and
why.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Respond.
4. Asks students what some of
their favourite places are and
why. Activity 5: (10 mins) - Complete.
Grammar box
1. Tells students to complete the - Think about the rules.
exercises in the grammar box. - Check.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 367
2. Students think about the rules.
3. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 368

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 6: (8 mins) - Work with a different partner.
different partner. Speaking
2. Asks them to think of their - Think of favourite place.
favourite place, but not to tell
their partner.
3. Their partner will ask questions - Try and guess what the place is.
about their favourite place. Their
partner will try and guess what
that place is.
4. Students ask and answer - Ask & answer.
questions to with their new
partner.

Step IV:
1. Asks students what their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
favourite places in town are. up (2 mins)
Asks them if they can guess your
favourite place.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their parents‟ favourite homework.
place. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 24 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 369

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 24: Cool place in my town
- Lesson B: Cool place in my town – Favourite places in my town
- Pages: 148-149
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about and describing your town.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe their
town through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Draws a picture of an Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
elephant on the board like Warmer: „Disappearing elephant‟ questions if they have
this: any.
2. Chooses a word (e.g. cinema,
hospital, school, etc.).
3. Writes a line for each letter
on the board.
4. Asks a student to guess a letter.
5. If the letter is in the word, writes
it in the correct space.
6. If the letter is not in the word,
writes it elsewhere on the board
and erase one part of the
elephant (e.g. begin with the
trunk, then the eye, then the

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 370

 mouth, etc.).

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 371

7. Repeats steps 4-6 until students
have guessed the word.
8. Puts students in groups of 5/6.
9. In groups, students take it in - Play the game.
turns to draw the elephant and
lets other students guess.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Cool places in my town –
What is the title about? Favourite places in my town

1. Puts students in pairs. Activity 1: (7 mins) - Work in pairs.

2. Tells students to look at the Lead in - Look at the picture.
picture in activity 1. Gives a
time limit of 30 seconds.
3. Stops students after 30 seconds. - Stop after 30 seconds.
Tells them to close their books.
4. In pairs, they try and remember - Try and remember what
what they see in the picture. they see.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.
6. Repeats steps 2-4, 2 more times. - Repeat steps 2-4, 2 more times.
7. Asks questions (e.g. where is the - Respond.
bus station? How many schools
are there?)

1. Tells students they are going Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

to read about Sophal‟s town. Students read for the big idea
2. Asks them if they remember
where Sophal is from.
3. Tells students to read quickly. - Read.
They don‟t need to
understand all the words.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Asks: Do you like Sophal‟s - Respond.
town? Is it the same or
different to your town?
6. Collect some ideas from the - Share ideas.
class.

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 3: (7 min) - Read & find the places in the
again and find the places in the Students read for the answers map.
map.
2. They write the places in their - Write the places in notebooks.
notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 372

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 373
1. Tells students they are going to Activity 4: (17 mins) - Listen carefully/draw a map of
draw a map of their town in their Writing their town.
notebooks.
2. Tells them to use the map of - Use the map of Sophal‟s town
Sophal‟s town in activity 3 as in activity 3 as a model.
a model.
3. Tells students to write some - Write some sentences about their
sentences about their map too. map.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 15 mins.

1. Tells students to walk around. Activity 5: (5 mins) - Walk around.

2. Tells students to ask and Speaking - Ask & answer.
answer questions about their
map. Do they have similar
maps? What things are
different? - Draw a smiley face.
3. Tells them to draw a smiley
face if they like the picture.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
Step IV:
1. Shows some completed Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Show completed pictures.
pictures of the students‟ town. up (2 mins)
2. Asks them what things are the - Respond.
same and different from each
other‟s map.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their friend‟s favourite homework.
place. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 24 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 374

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 8: There‟s no country like my country.
- Unit 24: Cool place in my town
- Lesson C: Cool place in my town – Turn left, turn right
- Pages: 150-151
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about and describing your town.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe their
town through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes a letter on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
(e.g. h). Warmer: „Beginning letter‟ questions if they have
2. Tells students to think of any.
words that start with the letter
written on the board (e.g.
house, hat, high, etc.)
3. Writes the words on the board
as students call them out.
4. Puts students in groups of 4/5.
5. Writes another letter on the
board.
6. Students write down words
beginning with the letter on the
board in their notebooks.
7. Assigns a „writer‟ in each team.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 375

8. Sets a time limit of 30 seconds
per letter.
9. The team with the most number - Play the game.
of words wins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: Cool places in my town –
What is the title about? Turn left, turn right

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the photos.

photos in activity 1. New words
2. Tells them to guess what they - Guess.
are in pairs. Gives a time limit of
30 seconds.
3. Asks students to number the - Number the photos.
photos in their notebooks.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Asks some students to listen and Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen & follow.
follow your instructions (e.g. Lead in
Sophal, walk straight on to the
board. Vithu, take your book.
Puts it in between your desk and
Vutha). Repeats this with
several students.
2. Then asks some students to give - Give directions to their
directions to some of their classmates.
classmates.

1. Tells students to look at the map Activity 3: (7 min) - Look at the map.
in activity 3. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students this is a map to - Listen carefully.
Avorng‟s house.
3. Tells students to listen and
follow the directions to
Avorng‟s house.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Plays the recording. - Listen.
6. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their partners. (1
min)
7. Plays the recording again. - Listen again.
8. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partners. (1 - Compare.
mins)
9. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 376

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 377
1. Puts students in pairs. Activity 4: (8 mins) - Work in pairs.
2. Tells students they are going to Speaking - Listen carefully.
find some places. They listen to
their partners for directions.
3. Student A turns to page 234. - Student A turns to page 234.
4. Student B turns to page 239. - Student B turns to page 239.
5. Tells students not to look at their
partner‟s page.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 6 mins.

1. Tells students to draw a map of Activity 5: (8 mins) - Draw a map of their house
their house from school in their Drawing from school.
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and give a time limit
of 7 mins.

1. Tells students to swap Activity 6: (5 mins) - Swap papers/notebooks.

papers/notebooks. Speaking
2. Tells students to take it in turns - Take turns to read the maps.
to read the maps to their
classmates. Are the directions
correct?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
4. Asks some students to read - Read out their classmates‟ map.
out their classmates‟ map to
the class.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about some places in my - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel town.
about the can do statements. I can talk about my favourite place - Respond.
in my town.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their friend‟s favourite homework.
place. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 25 on page 208 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 378
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 379
 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 25: Do I have to?
- Lesson A: Do I have to? – It‟s not fair
- Pages: 152-153
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your school and your home chores / obligations.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their school and their home
chores / obligations through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks students to look at the Warmer/Review (3 mins) - Look at the picture & cover
picture and cover the text. What Students guess the text.
can they see?
2. Asks students what‟s wrong - Respond.
with Tom?
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share ideas.
4. Comes back together as a class
and gets some different ideas.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 380

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (47 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Do I have to? – It‟s not
What is the title about? fair

1. Tells students that they are going Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
to listen and check their guesses. Students listen for the big idea
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Students listen. - Listen.
4. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answer with their
partner/group. - Share ideas.
5. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. - Write 1-9 in notebooks.
2. Tells students to write 1-9 in
their notebooks. Tells students to
try and remember/guess whether
the statements are true or false. - Listen & write the answers next
3. Tells them to listen and write the to the numbers in notebooks.
answers next to the numbers in
their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen.
5. Students listen. - Compare.
6. Students compare. - Ask & answer.
7. Asks and answers questions as a
class.
Activity 3: (7 min) - Listen carefully & respond.
1. Tells students to close their Grammar presentation / controlled
books and look at you. Asks: Do practice
you get in trouble f you don‟t
wear a school uniform?
Students: Yes. Asks: What
happens? Writes: you have to
wear a school uniform. On the
board. Asks: What‟s the
question? Students: Do you have
to wear a school uniform? Asks:
What‟s the answer? Students:
Yes, I do. (1 min). - Respond.
2. Tells students to answer the
questions in activity so that they
are true about them.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare.
4. Tells students to compare their
answers with their
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 381
 group/partner.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 382

1. Elicit/Pre-teach gets in more Activity 4: (3 mins)
trouble. Post task
2. Tells students to discuss the - Discuss the questions.
questions in activity 4 in
their groups.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 5: (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
going to listen to and learn a rap Rap! questions if they have
together. any.
2. Tells students to read along
and clap the beat. - Read along & clap beat.
3. Plays the recording.
4. Tells students to practice the - Listen.
rap in groups. - Practice the rap.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
6. Tells the left the half of the
room they are „mum‟. Tells the
right half of the room they are
„kids‟.
7. Plays the recording again. Have - Listen again.
students say the words and clap
and click.
8. Students try it without the - Try it out.
recording.
9. Swaps sides of the room so the - Swap the sides.
right side of the room are mums
and the left side of the room are
kids.
10. When your students are ready, - Start their work.
claps faster! Can students keep
up?
Activity 6: (5 mins)
1. Asks students what their mums Freer practice - Respond.
and dads tell them to do
around the house. Gets 1 or 2
suggestions.
2. Tells students to make their own - Make their own list of things
list of things they have to do they have to do around the
around the house. house.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
Activity 7: (3 mins)
1. Ask some „Do you have Freer practice - Respond.
to…‟ questions to 2 or 3
different students.
2. Tells students to compare - Compare.
what they have to do at home
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 383
 with
their friends.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 384

3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students they are going to Rap! (7 mins) - Do the rap again!
do the rap again, but this time Personalisation
the groups are going to take it in
turns to be the mums. Tells each
group that they need to choose a
job for the rest of the class.
Gives groups a moment to
choose a job.

Step IV:
1. Asks some questions about what Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
students have to do around the up (2 mins)
house.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they to do around the homework.
school.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 25 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 385

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 25: Do I have to?
- Lesson B: Do I have to? – Crazy schools
- Pages: 154-155
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your school and your home chores / obligations.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their school and their home
chores / obligations through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Tells students to stand up and Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
look at the teacher. Warmer: „Sok says‟ questions if they have
2. Divides the class in half (e.g. left any.
and right halves of the room).
Asks for a tem name from each
side.
3. Writes the team names on the
board. Marks 5 points for
each team (e.g. 11111).
4. Says that you will tell them to do
things. If you say „Sok says‟
they have to do them, but they
shouldn‟t do them if you don‟t
say Sok says.
5. When someone gets „out‟, erase

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 386

 a point from their team.
6. Continues until one team has lost - Play the game.
all their points. The other team is
the winner!

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (48 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Do I have to? – Crazy
What is the title about? schools

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture & cover
picture and cover the text. What Students guess the text.
can they see?
2. Asks students what can you see - Respond.
in the picture?
3. Asks students what do you think - Respond.
students learn at this school?
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share ideas.
5. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students they are going Students read and listen for the big
to listen and read and check idea
their guesses.
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Plays the recording.
4. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers. - Compare.
5. Tells students compare their
answers with their - Check.
group/partner.
6. Checks answers as a class. Activity 3: (10 min) - Respond.
Students read for the answers
1. Asks: What‟s the girl‟s name?
students: Her name is Lucy.
Tells students to point to the part
of the reading that they found
the answer.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Complete.
of 5 mins. - Compare.
3. Students complete.
4. Students compare with their - Check.
group/partner.
5. Checks answers as a class. Activity 4: (6 mins) - Look at the board.
Personalisation
1. Draws 2 columns on the board. - Respond.
2. Asks students questions until
you have written 1 sentence in
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 387
 the We have to column and one
sentence in the We don’t have to

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 388

 column. (e.g. Do we have to
wear a uniform at school?).
3. Puts students in groups of 4.
Tells students to choose 1 person
to be the writer.
4. Tells students to write down as - Write down as many as they can.
many as they can in the time
limit.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
6. Gets some different ideas. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 5: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to read about a school. Do Looking at a model (a model for
they think it is a real school? writing)
2. Reads the text. Asks: Is it a - Listen & respond.
real school or an imaginary
school?
3. Tells students to look at the
model and answer the questions
but not to write. They should
speak only.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Ask & answer.
5. Asks and answers the questions.
Activity 6: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students they are going to Makin notes
make up their own school. It
can be a real school (such as an
after school programme), an
imaginary school, or a very silly
school! - Make notes.
2. Tells students to make notes
about the school using the same
questions.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
Activity 7: (9 mins) - Use their notes to write about
1. Tells students that they are Writing their own dream school.
going to use their notes to write
about their own dream school. - Follow the model.
2. Students can follow the model
closely if this is what they
feel most comfortable with,
but encourage creativity!
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 389

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 390
1. Tells students to share their ideas Activity 8: (5 mins) - Share ideas.
with their group. Their group Post task – speaking
should ask extra questions about
what they have to and don‟t
have to do at the school.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students to tell you Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
some school rules in their up (2 mins)
school. Chooses students that
you don‟t normally call on.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
rules in their school with homework.
„have to and don‟t have to‟
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 25 on page 208 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 391

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 25: Do I have to?
- Lesson C: Do I have to? – It‟s a big job
- Pages: 156-157
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about your school and your home chores / obligations.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce their school and their home
chores / obligations through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes a word on the board Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
(e.g. small). Warmer: „How many things can questions if they have
2. Asks: What small things can you you think of?‟ any.
think of? (e.g. pencil, pen, rat,
paper). Accepts all possible
answers.
3. Tells students they are going
to play the same game in
groups.
4. Puts students into groups of 5/6.
5. Asks a question / writes on the
board (red, square, bigger than
the teacher, yellow)
6. Have the last category as “Pets”.
(This is in with today‟s lesson.)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 392

7. In groups, students write down

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 393

 as many things they can think of
that are red, square, bigger that
the teacher, yellow, etc.
8. Gives a time limit of 1 min for - Play the game.
each word or phrase.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (45 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Do I have to? – It‟s a
What is the title about? big job

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture & cover
picture and cover the questions. Students guess the questions.
What can they see?
2. Asks students to name the - Name the animals.
animals in the picture.
3. Asks students what they think - Respond.
Dara‟s new job might be.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share ideas.
5. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students they are going Students listen for the big idea
to listen and check their
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking - Listen.
questions. - Compare.
3. Students listen.
4. Tells students to compare - Check.
with their partner/group.
5. Checks answers as a class. Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
Students listen for the answers
1. Tells students to work with a - Tick & cross.
partner.
2. Tells students to try and
remember/guess if the sentences
are true or false. Tells them to
tick and cross in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Listen & check.
of 3 mins.
4. Tells students to listen and - Compare.
check.
5. Tells students to compare - Ask & answer.
with their group/partner.
6. Asks and answers questions as a
class. Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen carefully.
Brainstorming
1. Reads the instructions for
activity 3 as a class. Tells
students to think about “An
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 394
 English teacher” as a class. Tells
students to brainstorm some

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 395

 things that an English teacher
has to do and be as a class. (e.g.
They have to go to school. They
have to speak English. They
have to be fun. They have to be
smart…)
2. Tells students to continue - Brainstorm.
thinking about things that people
have to do in other jobs. Tells
students not to write but they
should speak.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Asks some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Asks a student to choose a „job‟ Activity 4: (7 mins) - Choose a job & respond.
but not to tell you what it is. Speaking
Asks questions with “Do you
have to …” (e.g. Do you have
to run? Do you have to be
scary? Etc.) Guess the job! Did
you guess right?
2. Tells students they are going to - Play the same game.
take it in turns to play the game
with their group/partner.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Asks students if they can guess Activity 5: (2 mins) - Listen carefully.

what job the interview questions Preparing to listen
are for. Gives them a hint. Tell
them it‟s from the list.
2. Reads the questions out loud to - Listen.
the class.
3. Gets some guesses. - Share guesses.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 6: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen to an interview Listening to a model
and decide if the person can do
the job.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Plays the recording and then tells - Listen & compare.
students to compare with their
group/partner.
4. Asks the class the answers. - Share answers.

1. Tells students to write their own Activity 7: (10 mins) - Write their own interview about
interview about one of a job of Speaking practice one job.
their choice.
2. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 396
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 397
 questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students work in pairs. - Work in pairs.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
„can do‟ statements. up (2 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about things I have to do. - Compare with a partner.
3. Asks students how they feel I can talk about things I don‟t have - Respond.
about the can do statements. to do.
I can ask what other people have to
do.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about one Homework: - Listen and take note of the
job they want to do and why. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 26 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 398

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 26: New babies
- Lesson A: New babies – Baby bird
- Pages: 158-159
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things and activities you like and dislike.
~ Talking about your hobbies and abilities.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things and activities they like
and dislike & their hobbies and abilities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Tells students to stand up. Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Puts students into 4 groups. Warmer: Review verbs questions if they have
3. Tells students to decide on a any.
team name.
4. Writes the team names on the
board.
5. Have one student from each
group go to the board and face
the class so they cannot see the
board.
6. Writes a verb on the board (e.g.
walk.) tells student facing the
class that they are not allowed to
look at the word! They have to
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 399
 look at their groups acting and
see if they can guess the word
from their group‟s acting!
(Tells students to look if no one
has guessed it after a minute).
7. Rule:
- The people at the board can talk.
- The people trying to act and
show the word are not allowed
to talk.
- First team to guess gets a point.
8. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: New babies – Baby bird
What is the title about?

1. Asks students to look at Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they Students guess
see? - Respond.
2. Asks students What do you think
the birds are? - Compare.
3. Tells students to compare
with their partner for a - Share answers.
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the
class. Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
Students listen for the big idea
1. Tells students that they are
going to listen and check their
guesses. - Listen.
2. Asks instruction checking - Compare.
question.
3. Students listen. - Check.
4. Tells students to compare
with their partner/group. Activity 2: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
5. Checks answers as a class. Students listen for the answers
- Guess/remember.
1. Tells students to work with a
partner.
2. Tells students to try and
remember/guess who says the - Write 1-8 in their notebooks.
sentences. Gives a 3 mins time
limit.
3. Tells students to write 1-8 in
their notebooks. Then tells them
to listen and write D for Dara
and L for Linda and A for
Avorng. - Listen & check.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 400
5. Tells students to listen and
check.
6. Tells students to compare with

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 401

 their group/partner.
7. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Puts students into groups of 4. Activity 3: (5 min) - Work in groups of 4.

Tells students to choose one Post task
person to be the writer in each
group. - Discuss & make a list of
2. Reads the question aloud to the things that babies do.
class. Tells students to discuss
the question in groups and to
make a list of things that babies
do. (e.g. smile, cry, sleep, eat,
drink, etc).
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Talks about things that babies do - Talk about things that babies do.
as a class.

1. Tells students to listen and Activity 4: (3 mins) - Listen & repeat.

repeat after the tape. Pronunciation review
2. Asks instruction checking /s/ speaks/ works / walks /z/ plays /
questions. drives / listens / lives / /iz/ brushes /
teaches / dances

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 5: (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Tells students that they are Game! Snap! - Listen carefully.
going to play a game. Holds up Works /s/ plays /z/ teaches /iz/ lives
3 pieces of paper. Tells students /z/ teaches /iz/ opens /z/ makes /s/
to write /s/ on one piece of saves /z/ cries /z/ likes /s/ practices
paper, /iz/
/z/ on another and /iz/ on the last
one.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and says 1 min! who
can be the first?!
4. Tells students to put 3 pieces of
paper in the middle of the table.
Tells students that they are
going to hear a word and they
need to listen to the end sound
and snap (hit) the sound they
hear. If they are first, they get a
point.
5. Asks instruction checking - Listen.
questions.
6. Plays the recording and
pauses after each word to find
out which end sound it was. Activity 6: (10 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
Freer practice - Talk about the people & be
1. Puts students in groups of 4. careful of their end sounds.
2. Tells students to talk about the
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 402
 people and be careful of their
end sounds!

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 403

3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students some Do Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
you know any who… questions. up (2 mins)
2. Listen to students answers. Are - Sound.
students using the end sounds?
Is it natural or do they need more
practice?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about one Homework: - Listen and take note of the
bird they like. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 26 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 404

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 26: New babies
- Lesson B: New babies – My weird family
- Pages: 160-161
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things and activities you like and dislike.
~ Talking about your hobbies and abilities.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things and activities they like
and dislike & their hobbies and abilities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells students to choose 1 person Warmer: Review New Words questions if they have
to be the writer. any.
3. Tells students you are going to
give them 1 minute to write
down as many different family
members as they can.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Writes: Is it your mum? On the
board.
6. Draws one of your family
members on the board (10
seconds! Don‟t worry if it
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 405
 looks

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 406

 stupid!) Asks: Who is it? Have
students guess!
7. Tells students they are going
to play a game in their groups.
They have to draw a family
member and the first person to
guess it in their group gets a
point.
8. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: New babies – My weird
What is the title about? family

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

picture and cover the text. What Students guess
can they see?
2. Asks students who are the - Respond.
people?
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share answers.
4. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Students read and listen for the big
going to listen and read and idea
decide who the people in the
picture are.
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Fingers Ready?
Plays the recording. - Listen & read.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Compare.
5. Tells students to compare with
their group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 3: (10 min) - Look at the board.
1. Writes likes hanging out Students read for the answers
with Linda. On the board. - Respond.
2. Asks: Who is it? Students: Tom. - Point to where they found the
3. Tells students to point to the part answer.
of the text where they found the
answer. Writes Tom likes
hanging out with Linda. - Answer the rest of the questions.
4. Tells students to answer the
rest of the questions in their
notebooks.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 407
5. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 408

 questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
6. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their group/partner.
7. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 4: (3 mins) - Listen carefully & work in pairs.
partner. Tells students that one Modeling/role play
person is going to pretend to be
Tom and the other person is
going to ask them questions
from the activity 4.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 5: (5 mins) - Take notes about their family
take note about their family. Taking notes & answer the questions.
They should not write sentences.
Tells them to answer the
questions in notes in their
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 6: (4 mins) - Ask & answer.
ask and answer questions about Comparing notes
their family with their partner.
Partners have to listen and ask
at least one extra question about
their partner‟s family.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 7: (9 mins) - Write about their own family.
going to write about their own Writing about your family
family using their notes.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 8: (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Tells students to take it in turns Post task - Take turns to read their writing.
to read their writing to their
group and to decide if they
would like to be in their
friend‟s family.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
4. Students share their work. - Share their work.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 409
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 410
 Step IV:
1. Have some students read their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Read their work.
pieces to the class. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their family they want to homework.
have. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 26 on page 209 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 411

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 26: New babies
- Lesson C: New babies – I hat them!
- Pages: 162-163
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things and activities you like and dislike.
~ Talking about your hobbies and abilities.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things and activities they like
and dislike & their hobbies and abilities through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students in groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Writes: What I like about Warmer: What I like about you is questions if they have
you is… on the board. any.
3. Asks students to help you finish
the sentence about you! (e.g.
What I like about you is you‟re
a good teacher. Or What I like
about you is you‟re funny.
4. Tells students they are going to
say nice things about each
person in the group for 30
seconds! Students have to finish
the sentence What I like about
you is with something true.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 412
5. Tells students you are going to
clap your hands at the end of 30
seconds and they need to change
the person they are talking
about.
6. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: New babies – I hat them!
What is the title about?

1. Asks students to look at Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they Students guess
see? - Respond.
2. Asks students Who is the boy
in the picture? Do you
remember his brother? What do
you think Tom thinks about his - Compare.
brother?
3. Tells students to compare - Share answers.
with their partner for a
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
class. Students listen for the big idea

1. Tells students to look at the

question and guess the answer
with their partner.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute. - Listen.
3. Tells students that they are - Compare.
going to listen and check their
guesses. - Check.
4. Students listen.
5. Tells students to compare Activity 3: (10 min) - Work with a partner.
with their partner/group. Students listen for the answers
6. Checks the answer as a class. - Remember/guess.

1. Tells students to work with a

partner.
2. Tells students to try and - Write a-h in their notebooks.
remember/guess the things
that Tom‟s brother hates not
has. Gives a time limit of 3
mins.
3. Tells students to write a-h in
their notebooks. Tells students to - Listen & check.
listen and circle the ones they
hear. - Compare.
4. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 413
 questions.
5. Tells students to listen and
check.
6. Tells students to compare
with their group/partner.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 414

7. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Writes the chant on the board. Activity 4: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
2. Students listen to the chant. Learn a chant - Listen.
3. Students listen and repeat. - Listen & repeat.
Makes up action as a class. (e.g.
I don‟t like an ice cream.
Students pretend to eat an ice
cream, I don‟t like blue.
Students point to something
blue, etc.)
4. Erases some words. Students
recite the chant.
5. Erases some more words. Do
this until you have completely
erased the chant.
6. Who can memorize the chant?
Nominates a few students to try
this out in front of the class. - Practice in pairs.
7. Students practice in pairs.
Activity 5: (5 mins) - Make their own list of things
1. Tells students to make their own Personalisation they hate.
list of things they hate.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
Activity 6: (6 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
1. Puts students in groups of 4. Discussion - Discuss.
2. Tells students they need to
discuss their answers with their
group. They need to talk about
whether they agree or disagree
with their friends hate list and
why.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
Class feedback / vote (3 mis) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells student that they will hear
sentences. They need to make
noise to say if they think the
things are true of false?
Rules:
- If students think a statement is
false, students stomp their
feet.
- If they think the answer is true,
students clap their hands.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Says a few sentences about
things you hat. E.g. I hate - be the teacher!
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 415
 noodles!
4. Have some students „be the

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 416

 teacher‟ and read things
from their hate list.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can say what people think. - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel I can tell you about my family.
about the can do statements. I can tell you what I hate and why. - Respond.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about how Homework: - Listen and take note of the
to solve when you hate someone. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 27 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 417

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 27: Yummy
- Lesson A: Yummy – What have you got for lunch today?
- Pages: 164-165
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about the food you like and dislike.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the food they like and dislike
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes the number „2‟ on Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
the board. Warmer: Play „Buzz‟ – Review questions if they have
2. Tells students to count up to 10 number 1-20 any.
but for every multiple of 2, they
say „buzz‟ (e.g. 1, buzz, 3,
buzz, 5, buzz…).
3. Writes another number on the
board (e.g. 3)
4. Tells students to count up to 20,
but for every multiple of 3, they
say „buzz‟ (e.g. 1, 2, buzz, 4, 5,
buzz…)
5. Puts students in groups of 4/5.
6. Writes another number on the
board.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 418

7. In groups, students take turns - Play the game.
counting up one number at a
time, but for any multiple of
that number, they say „buzz‟.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Yummy – What have you
What is the title about? got for lunch today?

1. Asks students to work with a Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture & cover the
partner. Tells students to look at Activate pre-existing vocab words.
the pictures and cover the words.
Do they know any of the names
for food and drink already?
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students to match the Activity 2: (5 mins) - Match the words with
words with the photos. New words the photos.
2. Tells students to write the words - Write the words in their
in their notebooks. notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their group/partner.
5. Students listen and check and - Listen & check/repeat.
repeat.

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 3: (4 min) - Look at the picture.

picture. What can they see? Students guess
2. Asks students to name the food
they know in the picture. - Name the food they know.
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the - Share answers.
class. - Guess.
5. Asks students to guess whose
lunch is whose. - Share answers.
6. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 4: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students they are going Students listen for the big idea
to listen and check their
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking - Listen.
questions. - Compare.
3. Students listen.
4. Tells students to compare - Check.
with their partner/group.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 419
5. Check the answer as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 420

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 5: (10 mins) - Work with a partner.
partner. Students listen for the answer
2. Tells students to try and - Remember/guess.
remember/guess if the
sentences are true or false.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Tells students to write 2-9 in - Write 2-9 & tick/cross.
their notebooks. Tells them to
listen tick for true and cross for
false.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.
6. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
7. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner/group.
8. Asks and answers questions as a
class.

1. Tells students to look at the Grammar presentation (2 mins) - Look at the grammar box/
grammar box for one minute. discuss with friends.
They can talk to their friends.
Tells students that you will ask
them questions at the end of one
minute.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute.
3. At the end of the time, claps - Think/respond.
your hands and ask concept
checking questions (e.g. Can
we count all foods in English?
Can we count apples? Can we
count rice? Can I say some
rices? Can I say some apple?

1. Tells students to look at the list Activity 6: (5 mins) - Look at the list of foods.
of foods from activity 2. Controlled practice
2. Says: an egg. Which column - Respond.
should write it in? can count or
can‟t count? Students: can
count. - Draw 2 columns.
3. Tells students to draw 2 columns
in their notebooks and to add the
new words to the right columns.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Compare.
5. Asks students to compare with
their group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks the answers as a class.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 421
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 422
1. Tells students to work with their Activity 7: (8 mins) - Work in pairs.
partner. Freer practice
2. Tells students to decide who is - Listen carefully and raise
student A and who is student B questions if they have
in their pairs. any.
3. Tells student A‟s to raise their
hands. Tells student B‟s to
raise their hands.
4. Tells students A‟s to turn to page
234. Tells student B‟s to turn
to page 239 but not to show
their partner their page.
5. Tells student A that they have a
shop and they will have a
customer soon. Tells student B
that they are going to go
shopping and ask the shop
keeper for things. They need to
tick the things of the list as they
go.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students if they got Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
everything on their shopping list. up (2 mins)
Listens to their answers. Are
they pronouncing the plural „s‟?
Are they adding plural „s‟ to
things they shouldn‟t?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what food they like and homework.
why. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 27 on page 209 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 423

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 27: Yummy
- Lesson B: Yummy – Have a picnic
- Pages: 166-167
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about the food you like and dislike.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the food they like and dislike
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells students to choose one Warmer: questions if they have
writer in each group. any.
3. Tells students to brainstorm as
many foods and drinks as they
can.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Tells students that they are
going to play a game. They will
hear foods and drinks. If a food
or drink is countable, students
have to bark like a dog. If a food
and drink is uncountable,

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 424

 students

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 425

 need to meow like a cat.
6. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Yummy – Have a picnic
What is the title about?

1. Asks students to look at Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture and cover the Students guess
text. - Respond.
2. Asks students What can you see
in the picture? What are they
doing? - Compare.
3. Tells students to compare
with their partner for a - Share answers.
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the
class.
1. Tells students to look at the Activity 2: (3 mins) - Look at the picture.
picture of the characters having a Pre-teach words
picnic and to try to fin the new
words in it. Tells students not to
write and gives a time limit of 1
minute.
2. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen & tick.
listen and tick the food that they Students read and listen for the big
hear. idea
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answer with their
group/partner. - Check.
4. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 426

1. This reading develops problem Activity 4: (10 mins) - Listen carefully.
solving skills. It works a little Students read for the answers
differently to a normal reading.
Students may benefit from
working in group/discussing
answers as a partner as they
go. Don‟t insist on silent
reading. - Do the first question.
2. Do the first question together as
a class. Have students point to
the answer in the text. - Do the other questions.
3. Tells students to do the other
questions in their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Complete.
5. Students complete. - Compare.
6. Students compare with their

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 427

 group/partner.
7. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to talk in their Activity 5: (3 mins) - Talk about the questions in their
groups about the questions. Post task/Personalisation groups.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students they are going to Activity 6: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

listen to a rap. Encourages Grammar practice
students to join in with clapping
and actions.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Repeats the recording 2-3 times - Listen.
or still students can join in.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 7: (3 mins) - Look at the Yummy yum
Yummy yum rap rules. Grammar presentation rap rules.
2. Do the first one together as a - Do the first one.
class. Have students point to
example in the rap. (e.g. We use
it when there is one. Because
have an (1) orange. Eat it up.
3. Tells students to talk to their - Talk & answer.
friends and answer the questions
with their friends. They do not
have to write it in their
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Asks and answers the questions - Ask & answer.
as a class.

1. Tells students fill the gaps in Activity 8: (3 mins) - Fill the gaps.
their notebooks. Controlled practice
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to write more lines Activity 9: (5 mins) - Write more line for the rap.
for the rap. They can use vocab Freer practice
from outside of today‟s lesson
(as long as in English).
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their group/partner.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 428

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 429
 Step IV:
1. Sing the Yummy Yum rap Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Sin the Yummy Yum rap.
together as a class. up (10 mins)
Encourages clapping and
actions.
2. Tells students that they are
going to do the rap together as a - Respond.
class.
3. Can students remember which
nouns are countable and which
nouns aren‟t?
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
benefits of having a picnic. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 27 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 430

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 9: Why does everything have to change?
- Unit 27: Yummy
- Lesson C: Yummy – Stop playing with your food!
- Pages: 168-169
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about the food you like and dislike.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce the food they like and dislike
through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks students to look at the Warmer/Review (3 mins) - Look at the picture.
picture and cover the text. What Activity 1: Students guess
can they see?
2. Asks students What food are the - Respond.
festivals about? What are the
people doing? Where do you
think they are?
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the - Share answers.
class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 431

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: Yummy – Stop playing
What is the title about? with your food!

1. Tells students they are going Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
to listen and match the texts Students read and listen for the big questions if they have
with the pictures. idea any.
2. Tells students they are going
to read along with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Fingers Ready?
Plays the recording.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Listen & read.
5. Tells students to compare their
answers with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.
Activity 3: (10 min)
1. Do the first question together as Students read for the answers - Do the first question as a class.
a class. Have students point to
where the answer is in the text.
2. Tells students to do the other - Do the other questions.
questions in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
4. Students complete. - Complete.
5. Students compare with their - Compare.
group/partner.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.
Activity 4: (7 mins)
1. Tells students to look at the Looking at a model - Look at the picture.
picture.
2. Asks: What kind of festival do - Respond.
you think this is?
3. Tells students to cover the text, - Cover the text & read the
read the question and guess the questions & guess the
answers with their partners. answers.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Tells students to now read the
text quickly and to discuss the - Read & discuss.
answers with their partner, but
not to write.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
7. Asks and answers questions as a
class. - Ask & answer.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 432

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 433
1. Puts students into groups of 4 Activity 5: (8 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
and tells them to choose a Personalisation
student to be the writer.
2. Tells students that they are - Write about their own food
going to write their own food festival.
festival. Tells students that the
idea is for the festival to be as
creative as possible.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

1. Tells students to use their notes Activity 6: (7 mins) - Use their notes to write about
to write about their festival. Writing their festival.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Asks the names of the festivals Freer practice: (7 mins) - Respond/look at the board.
and write them on the board.
2. Tells students to stand up. They - Listen carefully.
are going to talk to as many
people as they can and tell them
about their group‟s amazing
festival and make them think it
is the best festival to go to. They
have to leave their writing at
their desk. Who can win the
competition?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. At the end of the time, claps
your hands and tells students to
return to their seats. Reads out
the festival names one by one.
Have students clap for the
festival they think sounds the
most interesting.
OR:
1. Tells students they are going to
listen to each of the groups
read out their festivals and they
have to listen and se which one
they think sounds the coolest.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions about polite behavior
when a student is speaking to the
class.
3. When all the groups have - Talk about the names of the
shared, read out the festival festival.
names one by one. Have
students clap for the festival they
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 434
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 435
 think sounds the most
interesting.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about food and drink. - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel I can say what I have for lunch - Respond.
about the can do statements. today.
I can say what foods I like and
don‟t like.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
food they dislike and why. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 28 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 436

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 28: The swinging 60s
- Lesson A: The swinging 60s – I was young once
- Pages: 170-171
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about and describing things that existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe things
that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
2. Writes: Phnom Penh, Siem Lead in - Look at the board.
Reap, Battambang,
Sihanoukville on the board.
3. Tells students to talk about these - Talk.
places. What do they know?
What is in these cities? (e.g.
Angkor Wat is in Siem Reap.
The Royal Palace is in Phnom
Penh. There is a beach in
Sihanouk ville. My mum lives in
Battambang etc.)
4. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 437

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: The swinging 60s – I was
What is the title about? young once

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture/respond.

picture. What can they see? Is Students guess
she old or young? How old is
she?
2. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share answers.
3. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 1: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Students listen for the big idea
going to listen to find out where
the lady is from.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Listen.
3. Students listen. - Compare.
4. Tells students to compare
with their partner/group. - Check.
5. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 2: (9 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. - Write a-h/remember what the
2. Tells students to write a-h in woman says was in Phnom
their notebooks. Tells students to Penh.
try and remember/what the
woman says was in Phnom
Penh. - Tick/cross.
3. Tells them to listen and tick
and cross the things in their
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen.
5. Students listen. - Compare.
6. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Share answers.
7. Asks for some answers as a
class.
Activity 3: (3 min) - Think about Phnom
1. Asks students if they think Students guess Penh/Respond.
Phnom Penh was the same or
different in the 1960s. - Work in groups of 4.
2. Puts students into groups of 4.
Tells students to think of 3
things they things might be
different now.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 438
 of 2 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 439

4. Asks some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Asks students what they think Activity 4: (5 mins) - Think.

Monineath think about Phnom Students listen for the big idea
Penh 1960s.
2. Tells students they are going - Listen carefully.
to listen and check their
guesses.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Listen.
4. Students listen. - Compare.
5. Tells students to compare
with their partner/group. - Check.
6. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 5: (9 mins) - Work with a partner.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. - Write a-i/ remember what the
2. Tells students to write a-i in their woman says was in Phnom
notebooks. Tells students to try Penh.
and remember/what the woman
says was in Phnom Penh. - Tick/cross.
3. Tells them to listen and tick
and cross the things in their
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen.
5. Students listen. - Compare.
6. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Share answers.
7. Asks for some answers as a
class.
Activity 6: (5 mins) - Look at the sentences.
1. Tells students to look at the Grammar box
sentences. - Respond.
2. Says: I was born in Phnom Penh.
Asks: Now or before now?
Present or Past? Students: Past! - Make 2 lists of the numbers.
3. Tells students to make 2 lists of
the numbers only.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Check answers.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 7: (2 mins) - Look at the rules/discuss.
1. Tells students to look at the rules Grammar rule
and discuss the answer with their
partner.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 440

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 441
 Step IV:
1. Comes back together as a class. Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
Tells students you are going to up (6 mins)
read out some sentences. If they
are from the past, they have to
make a sound like an elephant. If
they are from the present, they
have to squawk like a bird.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they did when they homework.
were young.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 28 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 442

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 28: The swinging 60s
- Lesson B: The swinging 60s – The year is 2062
- Pages: 172-173
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about and describing things that existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe things
that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes Today is (today‟s day and Warmer/Review (2 mins) - Respond.
month) 20162. On the board. Lead in
Asks students to work out how
old they are. Can they still see?
How old they feel? (Have fun!
It‟s silly!)

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 443

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: The swinging 60s – The
What is the title about? year is 2062

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture/respond.

picture and cover the text. What Students guess
can they see? Who are the
people? What year is it in the
picture?
2. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share answers.
3. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Students read and listen for the big
going to listen and read. Who idea
are the people in the picture?
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking.
Fingers Ready? Plays the
recording. - Listen & read.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Compare.
5. Students compare their guess
with their partner/group. - Check.
6. Checks the answer as a class.
Tells students to turn to page
235 to check their guess!
Activity 3: (7 min) - Look at the board/respond.
1. Writes What year is it? On the Students read for the answers
board. Asks students: is it 2015?
Students: No! it‟s 2062! - Point to the answer in the text.
2. Asks students to point to the
answer in the text. - Complete.
3. Tells students to complete the
rest of the questions in their
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare.
5. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (6 mins) - Look at the board/respond.
1. Writes on the board: Today is Making notes
1st-January-2062. Pretend to be
old! Tells students how old you
are. Asks students how old they
are. - Make notes.
2. Tells students to make notes
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 444
 only about the questions in

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 445

 activity 4.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their
group/partner.
Activity 5: (6 mins) - Look at the board/respond.
1. Writes on the board: Today is Making notes
1st-January-2062. Pretend to be
old! Tells students how you felt
in grade 7. Asks students how
they felt in grade 7. - Make notes.
2. Tells students to make notes
only about the questions in
activity 4.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Compare.
4. Tells students to compare their
answers with their
group/partner. Activity 6: (10 mins) - Write about their lite.
Writing
1. Tells students they are going to
write about their life now (in
2062) and their life long ago
when they were a kid in grade
7. Tells students to follow the
model of Dara.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins. Activity 7: (5 mins) - Look at the board/respond.
Post task
1. Points to the date on the board.
Asks: What year is it? Students: - Talk about their school days.
2062!
2. Tells students that they are
speaking to all their old school
friends about their school days
in grade 7. Asks is grade 7 the
present or the past? Students:
past! Asks: I am happy or I was
happy? Students I was happy!
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 446

 Step IV:
1. Asks some students from Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
activity 5. up (2 mins)
2. Are students answering in the
past simple?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 447

 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they didn‟t do when homework.
they were young.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 28 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 448

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 28: The swinging 60s
- Lesson C: The swinging 60s – Sweet 60s songs
- Pages: 174-175
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about and describing things that existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce and describe things
that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students in groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Writes: What I like about Warmer: What I like about you is questions if they have
you is… on the board. any.
3. Asks students to help you finish
the sentence about you! (e.g.
What I like about you is you‟re
a good teacher. OR what I like
about you is you‟re funny.
4. Tells students they are going to
say nice things about each
person in the group for 30
seconds! Students have to finish
the sentence What I like about
you is…? With something true.
5. Tells students you are going to

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 449

 clap your hands at the end of the
time and they need to change the
person they are talking about.
6. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: The swinging 60s –
What is the title about? Sweet 60s songs

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture/respond.

picture and cover the text. What Students guess
can they see?
2. Tells students to talk to their - Talk/guess.
partner and guess who this is and
what her job was.
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share answers.
4. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that they are Students read and listen for the big
going to listen and read and idea
check their guesses.
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking.
Fingers Ready? Plays the
recording. - Listen & read.
4. Students listen and read along
with their fingers. - Compare.
5. Students compare their guess
with their partner/group. - Check.
6. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 3: (10 min) - Look at the board.
1. Writes: Was Phnom Penh the Students read for the answers
worst place in South East Asia?
On the board. - Respond.
2. Asks: Was Phnom Penh the
worst place in South East Asia?
Students: No! Tells students to
point to the answer in the text. - Complete.
3. Tells students to complete the
rest of the questions in their
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of mins. - Compare.
5. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks answers as a class.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 450
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 451
1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (10 mins) - Look at the picture/talk.
picture and talk about the Speaking
questions.
2. Puts students into pairs. - Work in pairs.
3. Tells students to decide who is - Decide who is A/B.
student A and B.
4. Tells student As to raise their
hands.
5. Tells student Bs to raise their
hands.
6. Tells students they will have 2 - Read & ask& answer.
mins to read about one of the
people and then they will have to
ask and answer questions with
their partner.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
8. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 5: (7 mins) - Look at the pictures & talk.
pictures and talk. Making notes
2. Tells students to choose one of - Choose one of the pictures.
the pictures but not to tell their
group!
3. Tells students to make notes - Make note.
about the questions.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 6: (7 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Tells students to take it in turns Speaking - Take turns to speak.
to speak about their person. Tells
the group they can then ask extra
questions. Can they guess which
picture they are talking about?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the can Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can say what there was and - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel wasn‟t in the past. - Respond.
about the can do statements. I can ask questions about what there
was and wasn‟t in the past.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 452

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 453
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about the Homework: - Listen and take note of the
benefits of listening to songs. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 29 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 454

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 29: The good old days
- Lesson A: The good old days – When I was young
- Pages: 176-177
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you did at the weekend and describing things you did / had when you were young.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they did at the weekend
and describe things they did / had when they were young through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks students about their Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Respond.
grandparents. (e.g. How old are Activity 1: Lead in
they? When/Where they born).
2. Asks students what they think - Respond.
their grandparents did/didn‟t
do when they were their age.
3. Tells students to work in pairs. - Look at the photos.
Tells them to look at the photos
in activity 1 for ideas.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Collects some ideas as a class. - Share ideas.
Asks students why they think so.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 455
 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: The good old days –
What is the title about? When I was young

1. Tells students they are going Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

to listen to Sophal‟s grandma Students listen for the big idea
talking about when she was
young.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Asks students how many of their - Talk about their guesses.
guesses are right.

1. Tells students to listen again and Activity 3: (7 min) - Listen & answer.
answer questions in their Students listen for the answers
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their classmates.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

5. Tells students to compare

with their partner for a
minute.
6. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 4: (10 mins) - Complete.
1. Tells students to complete the Grammar box
exercises in the grammar box in
their notebooks. - Guess/think about the rules.
2. Lets students think/guess the
rules.
3. Asks questions to help students.
4. Gives a time limit of 7 mins. - Check.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 5: (3 mins) - Work in groups of 4/5.
1. Puts students into groups of 4/5. Writing - Write 3 questions to ask the
2. Tells them to write 3 questions teacher.
each to ask the teacher. These
questions are about when you
were young. Tells them to write
their questions on pieces of
paper.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
Activity 5: (3 mins) - Swap papers.
1. Tells students to swap papers. Speaking and guessing - Guess.
2. Tells each group to guess
what the answers are to the
other groups‟ questions.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 456
3. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 457

 questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Writes When I was 6 years Activity 6: (5 mins) - Look at the board.

old… on the board. Writing
2. Asks some questions about when - Respond.
you were 6 years old.
Encourages students to guess the
answers (e.g. Did I live in
Phnom Penh when I was 6 years
old?)
3. Tells students to complete the - Complete.
sentences in activity 6 about
when you were 5 years old.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

1. Tells students to put their pens Activity 7: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

down and look at you/the board. Writing
2. Writes: Did you live…? On the
board. Tells students to complete
the question.
3. Points to activity 7 in the
student‟s book and do the
second question as a class.
Writes the question on the board.
4. Tells students to complete the - Complete.
questions in their notebooks.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

1. Puts students in pairs. Activity 8: (5 mins) - Work in pairs.

2. Tells students to ask and Speaking - Ask & answer.
answer questions about their
childhood using the question in
activity 7.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks students some questions in Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
activity 7. How many students up (2 mins)
did/liked/watched the same
things?

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 458

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 459
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about one Homework: - Listen and take note of the
days of the week. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 29 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 460

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 29: The good old days
- Lesson B: The good old days – How was your weekend?
- Pages: 178-179
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you did at the weekend and describing things you did / had when you were young.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they did at the
weekend and describe things they did / had when they were young through speaking & writing
correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes: was/wasn‟t/were/weren‟t Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
on the board. Warmer: was/were review questions if they have
2. Puts students into 4 groups. any.
Assigns a word for each groups
(i.e. group A – was, group B –
wasn‟t, group C – were, group
D
– weren‟t).
3. Assigns gestures for each group
(e.g. group A – stamp feet, group
B – clap hands, group C – stand
up, group D – say „hooray‟
4. Tells students they are going
to read a story, but there are
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 461
 gaps.
5. Tells students to complete the

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 462

 gaps with was, wasn‟t, were,
weren‟t. they do this by doing
the gestures assigned to their
groups if they think their word
fits (e.g. There a boy.
Group A stamp their feet).
6. Tells students to close their
books.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions.
8. Reads out texts from unit 28.
Reads at a slightly slower pace
and stops whenever you see
was, wasn‟t, were, weren‟t. Lets
the teams do the gestures for
these words.
9. If two or more teams do their
gestures, reads the sentence
again. Then points to the team
with the correct word.
10. Continues with 2 more short - Start their work.
texts from the book until your
time is up.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (44 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: The good old days – How
What is the title about? was your weekend?

1. Writes How was your Lead in: (5 mins) - Look at the board.
weekend? On the board.
2. Collects some ideas from the - Share ideas.
class and writes some of their
answers on the board. (don‟t
write long sentences, just words
or phrases).
3. Asks questions to help students.
4. Asks students to work in pairs - Ask & answer.
and asks and answers questions
about their weekend.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
6. Asks for some answers as a - Share answers.
class.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the picture.

picture in activity 1. New words
2. Tells them to guess what the - Guess.
pictures are in pairs.
3. Tells them to number the picture - Number the pictures.
and write their guesses in their
notebooks.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 463
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 464
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check. Tells them to point to the
pictures as they listen.
6. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students that the pictures in Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

activity 1 are all about Avorng‟s Students read for the big idea
weekend.
2. Tells them to read the text - Read the text.
quickly.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Asks: How was Avorng‟s - Respond.
weekend? Did he have a good
weekend? Did he have a boring
weekend?
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to read the text Activity 3: (7 min) - Read & complete.
again and complete the Students read for the answers
sentences in activity 3 in their
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their
partner/group. - Check.
4. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (4 mins) - Look at the board.
1. Tells students to close their Grammar box
books and look at you/the board. - Respond.
2. Writes: Yesterday, I walk to
school. Asks students if this is
correct. Asks what is wrong.
3. Adds – ed to walk. Asks students
if this is correct. Asks why.
4. Tells students that some words
like cry change spelling when Activity 5: (3 mins)
used in the past. Writing
5. Tells students to open their
books. Asks them to look how
cry is spelt. - Change the verbs into past form.
6. Tells them to write the past
form of the rest of the verbs in
their notebooks.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 465
 of 2 mins.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 466

8. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partners.
9. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students that there are 3 Activity 5: (3 mins) - Listen carefully/look at the
ending sounds for past simple Pronunciation board.
verbs. Writes them on the board.
(/t/ /d/ /id/)
2. Tells students to listen and write - Listen & write.
the words in the correct column.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their partners.
4. Plays the recording again. Tells - Listen again/compare.
students to compare their
answers with their partners.
5. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to close their Stirrer. TPR game! (3 mins) - Listen carefully.
books. Tells them to stand up.
2. Tells them you are going to say
some words and that they have
to do the corresponding action.
/t/ - students sit down
/d/ - students step forward
/id/ - students step backwards
3. Practices with one or two
words from the book.
4. Puts students into groups of 4/5.
5. Assigns a reader in each team.
The reader reads out words from
the book.
6. Other team members listen for
the ending sounds and do the
corresponding action.
7. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Puts students into pairs. Activity 6: (5 mins) - Work in pairs.

2. Tells students to write a Writing - Write a conversation about the
conversation about their weekend.
weekend. Tells them to use the
text in activity 1 as an example.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

1. Tells students to swap Activity 7: (4 mins) - Swap papers/notebooks.

papers/notebooks with other Speaking
pairs.
2. Tells students to practice the - Practice the conversation.
conversation in their pairs.
3. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 467
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 468
 questions and gives a time limit
of 30 seconds.
4. Tells students to swap papers - Swap papers/notebooks
again, students practice the again/ practice the
conversation. Gives a time limit conversation.
of 30 seconds.
5. Repeats until students have had
3/4 different conversations.

Step IV:
1. Asks some students what they Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
did last weekend. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what they did last weekend. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 29 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 469

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 29: The good old days
- Lesson C: The good old days – The best holiday ever!
- Pages: 180-181
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about what you did at the weekend and describing things you did / had when you were young.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce what they did at the weekend
and describe things they did / had when they were young through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into groups of 3/4. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells students to look at you. Warmer: Lip Reading questions if they have
3. Tells them you are going to say any.
a word silently. They will guess
the word by looking at the
movements of your mouth.
4. Says some words / phrases
students know either from this - Play the game.
unit or the previous ones.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 470

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: The good old days – The
What is the title about? best holiday ever!

1. Tells students to look at you. Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the board.

Writes some examples of regular New words
past simple verbs on the board
(e.g. hated, liked, watched)
2. Asks students what these words - Respond.
have in common (-ed ending).
Asks them why (they‟re
written in their past simple
forms).
3. Draws a timeline on the board
like this:
now

4. Tells students that these verbs

are used when talking about the
past before now.
5. Tells them that we use some
words to talk about the past too
(e.g. yesterday, a long time
ago, 3 days ago, last week)
6. Tells them to order and write the
words on the timeline (i.e. a long
time ago, last week, 3 days ago,
yesterday, last night) in their
notebooks.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins. - Listen & check.
8. Tells students to listen and
check. - Listen & repeat.
9. Tells students to listen and
repeat.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Look at the photos.
1. Tells students to look at the Lead in and students guess
photos in activity 2. Tells them
that these kids went on holiday. - Talk.
2. Tells students in each group to
talk about who had a good
holiday and a boring/not exciting
holiday. Asks them why they
think so.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Share ideas.
4. Collects ideas from the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 471

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 472
1. Tells students to listen and Activity 3: (3 min) - Listen & check.
check. Students listen for the big idea
2. Tells students to listen and - Listen & match.
match the pictures with the
people.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to listen again Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen & answer.

and answer the questions in Students listen for the answers
their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their partners and
gives a time limit of 1 minute.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Puts students in groups of 3/4. Activity 5: (10 mins) - Work in groups of 3/4.
2. Talks about the last days of Writing
Chinedu and Chisum‟s
holidays. What do they think
made Chinedu cry on the last
day? What made Chisum really
happy?
3. Asks some students their ideas. - Share ideas.
4. Tells students that that they are - Write the ending story.
going to write the ending of
each story. Tells them to write
on pieces of paper.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.
6. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
story endings with that at the
back of the book.

1. Asks students to swap pieces Activity 6: (6 mins) - Swap pieces of paper.

of paper. Speaking
2. Tells them to read the other - Read the other groups‟ writing.
groups‟ writing and decide if
they like the ending or not.
Students put a smiley face if
the like the ending.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute.
4. Then asks students to swap - Swap again.
papers again. Continue until
each group has read all the other
groups‟ writing.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 473

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 474
 Step IV:
2. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (5 mins)
3. Compare with a partner. I can talk about when I was young. - Compare.
4. Asks students how they feel I can talk about what I did at the - Respond.
about the can do statements. weekend.
I can ask and answer questions
about when I was young.
I can write an ending to a story.
I can say some words that end with
/t/ /d/ /id/.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about a Homework: - Listen and take note of the
good holiday. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 30 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 475

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 30: Cool memories
- Lesson A: Cool memories – What happened, really?
- Pages: 182-183
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things that happened and existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened and
existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Says a sentence (e.g. Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
Yesterday, I walked to school.) Warmer: Play sentence relay questions if they have
2. Have another student says your any.
sentence and add his/her
sentence (e.g. Yesterday, Miss
Mom walked to school. I cooked
dinner.)
3. Calls another student to say both
sentences and add his/her
sentence (e.g. Yesterday, Miss
Mom walked to school. I cooked
dinner and Sophal helped his
mum.)
4. Tells students they are going
to play the same game in big

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 476

 groups.
5. Tells them they can‟t
write. They have to
remember sentences
without writing.
6. Puts students into 2 groups.
7. Puts them in a circle. - Play the game.
8. Students take it in turns to say
a sentence, one sentence
building from the other, until
the last student has said
everybody‟s sentence.
Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Cool memories – What
What is the title about? happened, really?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture/respond.

picture in activity 1. Asks: What Lead in
happened? (Arunny is missing.)
2. Tells students to guess what - Guess what happened.
happened to Arunny with their
partners. Did somebody take
her? Who took her?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute.
4. Collects ideas from the class.

1. Tells students to listen and Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen & check.

check their guesses. Students listen for the big idea
2. Asks: Did you guess right? Who - Respond.
took Arunny?
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to listen again. Activity 3: (7 min) - Tick/cross.

They tick and cross the Students listen for the answers
sentences in activity 3.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their
partners/groups.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to complete the Activity 4: (8 mins) - Complete.

exercises in the grammar box. Grammar box
2. Lets students guess/think about - Guess/think about the rules.
the rules.
3. Asks questions to help students.
4. Gives a time limit of 5 mins.
5. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 477
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 478
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Writes one true and one false Activity 5: (8 mins) - Look at the board.
sentence about you on the board. Writing
(e.g. I liked walking when I was
3 years old.)
2. Tells students to guess which is - Guess.
true and which is false.
3. Puts a tick next to the true - Tick/cross.
sentence and cross next to the
false sentence.
4. Tells students that they are - Write true/false sentences about
going to write true/false them.
sentences about them.
5. Tells them to write the sentences
in their notebooks.
6. Asks instruction checking
question and gives a time limit
of 6 mins.

1. Tells students to swap Activity 6: (7 mins) - Swap papers/notebooks.

papers/notebooks. Speaking
2. Puts students in pairs. - Work in pairs.
3. Tells them to guess which of
their friend‟s sentences are - Guess true/false.
true/false. They put a tick or a
cross next to the sentences.
4. Tells students to find out if
their guesses were correct by
asking their partners questions.
Tells them to record their
scores.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks students how many of their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
guesses were right. up (3 mins)
2. Checks students‟
pronunciation as a class.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about one Homework: - Listen and take note of the
thing they still remember. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 30 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 479

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 480

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 30: Cool memories
- Lesson B: Cool memories – All about dinos!
- Pages: 184-185
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things that happened and existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened
and existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Asks some students what they Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
did yesterday. Writes some of Warmer: Play „Spin the pen‟ questions if they have
their answers on the board. any.
2. Puts students into groups of 5/6.
Tells them to sit in circles.
3. Tells each group to have a pen
/ pencil ready.
4. Tells each group that they are
going to ask and answer
questions about what they did
yesterday / last night / last
week.
5. One student spins the pen.
Whoever the pen points to ask
a question (e.g. Did you go

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 481

 swimming yesterday? The

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 482

 student chooses one person in
the group to answer the
questions.
6. Corrects students‟ mistakes. - Play the game.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (46 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Cool memories – All
What is the title about? about dinos!

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the photos.

photos in activity 1. New words
2. Tells students to guess what the - Guess.
photos are of with their partner.
3. Tells them to number the photos - Number the photos.
in their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partners/groups.
6. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
7. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 2: (2 mins) - Look at the pictures.

pictures in activity 2. Lead in
2. Tells them to guess what the - Guess.
pictures are of.
3. Tells students to talk to their - Talk & guess.
partners and guess.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Collects ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students the pictures are of Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen & talk about what they
dinosaurs. Tells them to talk Students read for the big idea know about dinosaurs.
about what they know about
dinosaurs.
2. Gives a time limit of 2 mins.
3. Collects ideas from the class. - Share ideas.
4. Tells students to read and - Read & check.
check their guesses.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students to read again and Activity 4: (7 mins) - Read & answer.
answers the questions in activity Students read for the answers
4.
2. Asks instruction checking
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 483
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 484
 questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their
partner/groups.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Draws a dinosaur on the board Activity 5: (7 mins) - Look at the board.

like this: Game! Draw the dinosaurs!

2. Tells students that the dinosaur - Listen carefully.

is missing some body parts.
They will draw the missing body
parts.
3. Puts students into 4 groups. - Work in 4 groups.
4. Asks one student from each team
to come to the front. Blindfold
one student or have him / her
close his/her eyes. No cheating!
No peeping!
5. Says: draw the eyes (nose, legs,
feet, tail, ears, etc.)
6. Tells each group to direct their
group mate. They tell him/her
where to draw by giving
instructions such as move to the
right, left, go up, go down, etc.)
You might want to write these
phrases on the board.
7. Continues until the time is up. - Start their work.
Asks some questions about the
students‟ dinosaur (e.g. where
are the teeth?). Asks them to
give a name for this dinosaur.

1. Puts students in pairs. Activity 6: (8 mins) - Work in pairs.

2. Asks student A to turn to page Listening and Speaking - Listen carefully.
236. Asks student B to turn to
page 240.
3. Tells students NOT to show their
text their partners. Tell them
their texts are secret.
4. Tells student A to read his/her - Read their texts.
text to his/her partner. Tells
student B to look at her/his text
and correct the mistakes. There
are 4 mistakes.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
6. Tells students to swap roles. - Swap roles.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 485
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 486
 Student B reads his/her text.
Student A listens and corrects
the mistakes in his/her text.
7. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
texts. Did they find all the
mistakes?

1. Asks students what they would Activity 7: (7 mins) - Respond.

like to know about dinosaurs. Writing
2. Writes some of their answers on
the board. Don‟t write the
complete sentences.
3. Tells them to write 3 questions - Write 3 questions about
about dinosaurs in their dinosaurs.
notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
notes. Can they answer their
classmates‟ questions?

Step IV:
1. Asks some students their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
questions. Answers some of the up (2 mins)
questions, if you can.
2. Tells them to answer at least one
of their classmates‟ questions
for homework.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about one Homework: - Listen and take note of the
animal they know and like most. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 30 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 487

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 10: It‟s all in the past
- Unit 30: Cool memories
- Lesson C: Cool memories – All about cavemen!
- Pages: 186-187
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things that happened and existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened
and existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. The teacher whispers a word to a Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
student on the first row. Warmer: Play „Whisper‟ questions if they have
2. The student in turn, whispers to any.
the next student, until the last
student at the end of the row.
3. The last student either shouts the
word or writes it on the board. - Play the game.
Tip: students could be asked to
stand in line.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 488

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: Cool memories – All
What is the title about? about cavemen!

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the pictures.

picture in activity 1. New words - Work in pairs/guess what the
2. Tells students to work in pairs. pictures are of.
Tells them to guess what the
pictures are of and find them in
the pictures.
3. Tells them to number the - Number the pictures.
pictures in their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
and gives a time limit of 2
mins. - Listen & check.
5. Tells students to listen and
check. - Listen & repeat.
6. Tells students to listen and
repeat.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students that this girl lived Lead in
a long, long time ago. - Talk with their partners.
2. Tells students to talk with their
partners. Ask: what did she
have? What didn‟t she have?
What did she do? What didn‟t
she do? Did she have toys? Did
she have a computer? Did she
brush her hair?
3. Tells students to draw a concept - Draw a concept map.
map in their notebooks similar to
the one in activity 2 and write
their ideas. Tells them not to
write complete sentences.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Share ideas.
5. Collects ideas from the class.
Activity 3: (4 min) - Read & check.
1. Tells students to read the text Students read for the big idea
quickly and check their guesses.
How many of their guesses were
correct?
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins. - Compare.
3. Tells students to compare their
answers with their
partners/groups. - Check.
4. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 489

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 490
1. Tells students to read the text Activity 4: (6 mins) - Read & answer.
again and answer the questions Students read for the answers
in activity 4.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their
partners/groups.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Writes now and 15,000 years Activity 5: (10 mins) - Look at the board/respond.
ago. Asks students if Amika‟s Writing
life was different or the same
as theirs (different).
2. Asks some things which are - Respond.
different. Writes ideas on the
board. (e.g. Amika didn‟t have
a house. I have a house.
3. Puts students in groups of 3/4. - Work in groups of 3/4.
4. Tells them to write some more - Write some more differences.
differences between now and
15,000 years ago.
5. Tells them to write on pieces of - Write on pieces of paper.
paper. Tells them to draw some
pictures too.
6. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

1. Chooses one student from each Activity 6: (8 mins) - One student from each team to
team to report about their work. Speaking be the reporter & report.
2. Calls each reporter in front of - Talk about their work.
the class. Tells them to talk
about their work for 1 minute.
3. Asks the other students to think - Respond.
of one question for the reporting
team.
4. Displays some of the
students‟ work.
5. Have a class vote to see which of
the pictures students like best.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
can do statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about what people did a - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel long time ago.
about the can do statements. I can ask questions about what - Respond.
people did a long time ago.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 491

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 492
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what you did when you were homework.
in grade 6.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 31 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 493

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 31: What happened?
- Lesson A: What happened? - Weird weekend?
- Pages: 188-189
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing and recalling a memory.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and recall a memory through
speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (3 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
2. Write: What‟s your favourite Lead in - Look at the board.
thing to do on the weekend? On
the board.
3. Tells students to talk about their - Talk.
ideas.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Gets some answers from the - Share ideas.
class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 494

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (36 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: What happened? – Weird
What is the title about? weekend?

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture.

picture in activity. What can Students guess
they see?
2. Asks students What is - Respond.
happening?
3. Asks students Why?
4. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share answers.
5. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
1. Tells students they are going Students listen for the big idea
to listen and check their
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking - Listen.
questions. - Compare.
3. Students listen.
4. Tells students to compare - Check.
with their partner/group.
5. Checks the answer as a class. Activity 3: (10 min) - Work with a partner.
Students listen for the answers
1. Tells students to work with a - Write 1-7/remember/guess.
partner.
2. Tells students to write 1-7 in
their notebooks. Tells them to
try and remember/guess the - Write the answers next to the
answer. numbers.
3. Tells them to listen and write the
answers next to the numbers in
their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit - Listen & check.
of 3 mins. - Compare.
5. Students listen and check.
6. Students compare with their - Share answers.
group/partner.
7. Asks for some answers as a
class. Activity 4: (3 mins) - Look at the picture of Nika.
Students look at a model
1. Tells students to look at the
picture of Nika. Asks How old is - Read about Nika/respond.
she?
2. Tells students they are going to
read about Nika very quickly
and find out why last weekend
was special. Tells students when
they think they know to put up
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 495
 their hand.
3. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 496

 questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute.
4. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 5: (5 mins) - Work with a partner.

partner. Students discuss a model
2. Tells students to discuss what - Discuss what Nika would
Nika would answer to the answer to the questions.
questions.
3. Tells students they don‟t need
to write.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Asks and answers as a class. - Ask & answer.

1. Tells students to use the Activity 6: (4 mins) - Use the questions in activity 5 to
questions in activity 5 to Students make notes make notes about their own
make notes about their own Sunday.
Sunday.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
o f 3 mins.
Activity 7: (7 mins) - Write about their own weekend.
1. Tells students to write about Students write
their own weekend. They can
use the model for help.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Read their writing in groups.
3. Tells students to read their
writing in groups.
Step IV:
1. Asks some students to share Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Share their writing.
their writing with the class. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what you did on last homework.
Saturday. Reminders: - Listen and take note.
2. Tells students to read the word
list for unit 31 on page 209 in
the student‟s book. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.
3. Says goodbye to the class.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 497

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 498

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 31: What happened?
- Lesson B: What happened? - It was the scariest thing ever!
- Pages: 190-191
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing and recalling a memory.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and recall a memory through
speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into groups of 4. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
2. Write: What I like about is… on Warmer: What I like about you is - Listen carefully and raise
the board. questions if they have
3. Asks students to help you finish any.
the sentence about you! (e.g.
What I like about you is you‟re
a good teacher.)
4. Tells students they are going to
say nice things about each
person in the group for 30
seconds! Students have to finish
the sentence What I like about
you is with something true.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Play the game.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 499

 Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: What happened? – It was
What is the title about? the scariest thing ever!

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 1: (5 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Tells students to look at the New words/Lead in - Look at the pictures/respond.
pictures, cover today‟s text
and guess today‟s story.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
4. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 2: (2 mins) - Look at the picture.

picture and cover the text. What Students guess
can they see?
2. Asks students How does the boy - Respond.
feel? Why?
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
ideas with their partner for a
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the - Share answers.
class.

1. Tells students they are going Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen carefully.

to listen and read and check Students read and listen for the big
their guesses. idea
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Fingers Ready? Plays
the recording.
4. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answer with their
group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 4: (10 mins) - Do the first question as a class.
1. Do the first question together as Students read for the answers
a class. Have students point to
where the answer is in the text. - Do the other questions.
2. Tells students to do the other
questions in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Complete.
4. Students complete. - Compare.
5. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 500

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 501
1. Books closed. Writes Are you Activity 5: (7 mins) - Respond.
scared of ghosts? On the board. Post task/Brainstorming
Asks some students around the
room. Asks why?
2. Tells students to work with a - Talk.
partner and talk about things
in the pictures one by one.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Comes together as a class. Say: - Respond.
Put your hand up if you‟re
scared of ghosts!

1. Tells students to work by Activity 6: (5 mins) - Talk about a time they were
themselves. Tells students to talk Note taking/Getting ready to talk really scared.
about a time they were really
scared. They can use an idea
from the last activity, or
something else.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.

1. Tells students to work in Activity 7: (8 mins) - Tell the class their scary story.
groups and take it in turns to Freer speaking practice
tell their friends their scary
story. Students should listen
and ask follow up questions.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.

Step IV:
1. Asks one person in each Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Read their scariest story.
group to take it in turns up (2 mins)
reading out their scary stories
to the class.
2. Have a class vote on the scariest
story.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about Homework: - Listen and take note of the
what you scare most. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 31 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 502

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 503

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 31: What happened?
- Lesson C: What happened? - They‟re important to me
- Pages: 192-193
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Describing and recalling a memory.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe and recall a memory through
speaking & writing correctly & appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Uses the board eraser or a pencil Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
case. Asks: What is it? Talks Warmer: Pass the eraser - Listen carefully and raise
into like a phone. Students: It‟s questions if they have
a phone. any.
2. Tells students that they are
going to play the game in their
groups.
3. Rules: you get a point if your
friends can guess what you are
pretending the eraser is. But all
the members lose a point if they
can‟t guess. The person with the
eraser is not allowed to talk. The
group must speak in English!
Some ideas: an egg, a bird, a

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 504

 cat, a pen, a notebook, lunch, an

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 505

 apple, an orange, a friend, a
game.
4. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: What happened? –
What is the title about? They‟re important to me

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the pictures/respond.

pictures. What can they see? Students guess
2. Tells students not to read the - Match the words with
text. But try to match the words the photos.
in the box with the photos.
3. Tells students to compare with - Compare.
their partner for a minute.
4. Gets some answers from the - Share answers.
class.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen and read and Students read and listen for the big
check their guesses. idea
2. Tells students to read along
with their finger.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. Says: Fingers
ready? Plays the recording.
4. Students listen and read along - Listen & read.
with their fingers.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answer with their
group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 3: (10 min) - Do the first question as a class.
1. Do the first question together as Students read for the answers
a class. Have students point to
where the answer is in the text. - Do the other questions.
2. Tells students to do the other
questions in their notebooks.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins. - Complete.
4. Students complete. - Compare.
5. Students compare with their
group/partner. - Check.
6. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 4: (3 mins) - Work in pairs/ask & answer.
1. Puts students in pairs. Tells them Post task/Personalisation
to ask and answer the questions.
They should ask one follow up
question after each answer.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 506
2. Asks instruction checking

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 507

 questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 5: (4 mins) - Work with a partner.

partner. Students look at a model
2. Tells students that they
don‟t have to write.
3. Tells students that they are - Read the model.
going to give them 3 mins to
read the model and find the
answers to the questions.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their partners.
6. Asks and answers questions as a - Ask & answer.
class.

1. Tells students to think about Activity 6: (5 mins) - Think about the answers to the
their answers to the questions in Taking notes questions.
activity 5and to write notes in
their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.

1. Tells students to ask and Activity 7: (3 mins) - Ask & answer.

answer questions with a partner Comparing ideas with a partner
and to ask one follow up
question.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
Activity 8: (7 mins) - Write about someone who is
1. Tells students to use their notes Writing important.
to write about someone who is
important to them. They should
include the answer to the
question their partner asked.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 6 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk/say what I did on the - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel weekend.
about the can do statements. I can talk about a time I was really - Respond.
scared.
I can talk about someone who is
important to me.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 508

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 509
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about why Homework: - Listen and take note of the
their parents are important to homework.
them.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 32 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 510

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 32: Is that really real?
- Lesson A: Is that really real? – That never happened!
- Pages: 194-195
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Giving and following directions.
~ Talking about what you are doing now.
~ Talking about things that existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and follow directions and introduce
what you‟re doing now & things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes some first meeting vocab Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
on the board. E.g. Hi. How are Warmer: Feeling greetings questions if they have
you? How are you? What‟s any.
your name?
2. Tells students to stand up.
(you can have students work in
groups if it is too small to have
students walking around the
room).
3. Tells students that they are
going to do a get to know you
role
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 511
 play.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 512

4. Have students do the activity
once normally.
5. Tells students to choose a
different partner, but this time
they have just found out that
they lost their telephone! How
do they feel? Tells students to
have the conversation with this
feeling. - Play the game.
6. Keeps changing the situation
(and partners!). Dog is dead.
You have a million dollars! Etc.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (42 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: Is that really real? – That
What is the title about? never happened!

1. Asks students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the picture/respond.

picture. What can they see? How Students remember / Lead in
many things can they name?
2. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner for a
minute. - Share answers.
3. Gets some answers from the
class.
Activity 2: (5 mins) - Respond.
1. Asks students what they think Students listen for the big idea
Bopha will say about Dara‟s
picture? - Talk to their partner.
2. Tells students to talk to their
partner for a minute. - Listen carefully.
3. Tells students that they are
going to listen and check their
guesses.
4. Asks instruction checking - Listen.
questions. - Compare.
5. Students listen.
6. Tells students to compare with - Check.
their partner / group.
7. Checks the answer as a class. Activity 3: (10 min) - Work in pairs.
Students listen for the answers
1. Tells students to work with a - Remember/guess.
partner.
2. Tells students to try and
remember/guess the things that
Bopha says about Dara‟s
picture. - Listen & check.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare.
4. Tells students to listen and
check. - Ask & answer.
5. Tells students to compare
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 513
 with their group/partner.
6. Asks and answers questions as a
class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 514

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 4: (7 mins) - Look at the picture.
picture and see how many more Post task
things they can see. Tells
students to write full sentences
in their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their group/partner.
4. Asks answers as a class. - Share answers.

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 5: (3 mins) - Look at the pictures/talk.

pictures and talk to their Review vocab
partner about which of the
things they have in their house.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Gets answers from the class. - Share answers.

1. Tells students to write Activity 6: (5 mins) - Write sentences about what they
sentences about what they had Writing had/didn‟t have 50 years ago.
and what they didn‟t have 50
years ago.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 4 mins.
Activity 7: (8 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
1. Puts students in groups of 4. Freer practice - Discuss the questions.
2. Tells students to discuss the
questions in their groups.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 7 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks some students their ideas. Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
Are students using the past up (2 mins)
simple?
2. Are students using auxiliary
verbs correctly?

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Tells students to write about one Homework: - Listen and take note of the
real thing they met in the past. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 32 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 515

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 516

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 32: Is that really real?
- Lesson B: Is that really real? – Paper Fortune Tellers
- Pages: 196-197
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Giving and following directions.
~ Talking about what you are doing now.
~ Talking about things that existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and follow directions and introduce
what you‟re doing now & things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes the number „2‟ on Warmer/Review (10 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
the board. Warmer: Game! Buzz questions if they have
2. Tells students to count up to 10 any.
but for every multiple of 2, they
say „buzz‟ (e.g. 1, buzz, 3,
buzz, 5, buzz…).
3. Writes another number on the
board (e.g. 3)
4. Tells students to count up to 20,
but for every multiple of 3, they
say „buzz‟ (e.g. 1, 2, buzz, 4, 5,
buzz…)
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 517
5. Puts students in groups of 4/5.
6. Writes another number on the
board.
7. In groups, students take turns - Play the game.
counting up one number at a
time, but for any multiple of
that number, they say „buzz‟.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (38 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: Is that really real? – Paper
What is the title about? Fortune Tellers

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (3 mins) - Look at the picture/guess.

questions and see if they know Lead in
the game in the picture. If they
don‟t know, guess.
2. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner.
3. Checks the answer as a class. - Check the answer.

1. Asks students what they think Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.

the paper fortune teller will tell Students listen for the big idea
Linda.
2. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.
3. Tells students that they are
going to listen and check their
guesses.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Listen.
5. Students listen. - Compare.
6. Tells students to compare
with their partner/group. - Check.
7. Checks the answer as a class.
Activity 3: (10 min) - Work in pairs.
1. Tells students to work with a Students listen for the answers
partner. - Write 1-8/remember/guess.
2. Tells students to write 1-8 in
their notebooks. Tells students to
try and remember/guess the
answers to the questions. - Listen carefully.
3. Tells them to listen and write the
answers next to the numbers in
their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins. - Listen & check.
5. Students listen and check. - Compare.
6. Tells students to compare their
answers with their - Share answers.
partner/group.
7. Asks for some answers as a
class.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 518
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 519
1. Put students in groups of 4. Tells Activity 4: (7 mins) - Work in groups of 4.
students to choose one person to Brainstorming
be the writer.
2. Reads the instruction as a class. - Listen carefully.
What do you think she wanted to
see? Gets some ideas from the
class. (e.g. You are beautiful.
You are nice. Etc.)
3. Asks students to brainstorm as - Brainstorm.
many things as they can that can
go in the paper fortune tellers.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
5. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students to follow the Activity 5: (7 mins) - Make their own paper fortune
instructions to make their own Reading tellers.
paper fortune tellers. Students
can work alone or with a
partner.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Activity 6: (7 mins) - Go around the room & play the
1. Tells students to go around the Speaking paper fortune tellers.
room and play the paper fortune
tellers.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
Step IV:
1. Asks some questions from Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
today‟s lesson. (e.g. What‟s up (2 mins)
your name? how old are you?)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Asks students: „Do they Homework: - Listen and take note of the
believe in Fortune Teller?‟ homework.
why or why not?
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 32 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 520
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 521
 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 32: Is that really real?
- Lesson C: Is that really real? – Getting in trouble at home
- Pages: 198-199
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Giving and following directions.
~ Talking about what you are doing now.
~ Talking about things that existed in the past.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and follow directions and introduce
what you‟re doing now & things that existed in the past through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. This is an acting game. One Warmer/Review (6 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
student stands in front of the Warmer: Game! What are you questions if they have
class doing a continuous doing? any.
ing acting. (e.g. fishing)
2. Student 2 comes and asks what
are you doing?
3. Student 1 doesn‟t say I am
fishing. They say a different
ing action. I‟m flying!
4. Student 2 has to do the action
student 1 said. (e.g. flying)
5. Student 2 keeps pretending to fly
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 522
 until student 3 asks What are
you doing? Student 2 doesn‟t
say flying. They say a different
ing action.
6. Continues until all students have - Play the game.
had a turn. It‟s really funny! (if
you have a very large class, just
point to some people. )

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: Is that really real? –
What is the title about? Getting in trouble at home

1. Puts students in groups of 4. Activity 1: (3 mins) - Work in groups of 4.

2. Books closed. Do your parents Lead in - Listen carefully.
leave you alone sometimes? Are
you good or naughty when they
are away?
3. Tells students to discuss the - Discuss.
questions in their groups.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
5. Asks some students their - Share ideas.
answers.

1. Asks students to look at Activity 2: (5 mins) - Look at the picture.

the picture. What can they Students guess
see? - Think/respond.
2. Asks students Do you think Dara
is being good or naughty? Why? - Compare.
3. Tells students to compare
with their partner for a - Share answers.
minute.
4. Gets some answers from the
class.
1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (5 mins) - Listen carefully.
going to listen and check their Students listen for the big idea
guesses.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Listen.
3. Students listen. - Compare.
4. Tells students to compare
with their partner/group. - Check.
5. Checks the answer as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 523

1. Tells students to work with a Activity 3: (10 min) - Work with a partner.
partner. Students listen for the answers
2. Tells students to write 1-8 in - Write 1-8/remember/guess.
their notebooks. Tells students to
try to remember/guess the
answers.
3. Tells students to listen and write - Listen & write.
the answers next to the numbers

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 524

 in their notebooks.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
5. Students listen and check. - Listen & check.
6. Tells students to compare - Compare.
with their partner/group.
7. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students to work with their Activity 4: (3 mins) - Work with their partner.
partner. Post task
2. Tells students to discuss the - Discuss the questions.
questions in their groups.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
4. Gets some ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students to talk to their Activity 5: (3 mins) - Talk/match.

partners, and match the words Revision
with the pictures.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Tells students to work in pairs. Activity 6: (10 mins) - Work in pairs.

Tells students to decide who is Speaking
student A and who is student B.
2. Tells students As to puts their - Listen carefully.
hands up, and tells student B to
put their hands up.
3. Tells students that their partner - Draw the bedroom.
has a picture of the bedroom
they need to draw and they have
to use questions with Where is
the and then draw them in
their pictures.

1. Tells student As to turn to page Activity 7: (2 mins) - Listen carefully.

236 and student Bs turn to page
240.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.

Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Look at the can do statements.
can do statements. up (3 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can talk about what people did and - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel didn‟t do in the past. - Respond.
about the can do statements. I can make a paper fortune teller.
I can draw where things are in a
bedroom.
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 525
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 526
 Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Asks students to draw a picture Homework: - Listen and take note of the
of their living room. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 33 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 527

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 33: More questions
- Lesson A: More questions – Silly questions!
- Pages: 200-201
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things that happened in the past and present.
~ Talking about your most memorable day in grade 7.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened in the
past and present & their most memorable day in grade 7 through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Writes a word on the board Warmer/Review (7 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
(e.g. small). Warmer: How many things can you questions if they have
2. Asks: What small things can you think of? any.
think of? (e.g. pencil, pen, rat,
paper).
3. Tells students they are going
to play the same game in
groups.
4. Puts students in groups of 5/6.
5. Assigns a writer in each group.
6. Asks a question / writes on the
board. (e.g. red, square, bigger
than the teacher, yellow)
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 528
7. In groups, students write down

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 529

 as many things as they can think
of that are red, square, bigger
that the teacher, yellow, etc.
8. Gives a time limit of 1 minute
for each word or phrase.
9. The group with the most number - Play the game.
of words wins.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (41 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson A: More questions – Silly
What is the title about? questions!

1. Writes Silly questions on the Activity 1: (8 mins) - Look at the board.

board. Lead in
2. If students don‟t already
know what silly means,
encourages them to guess by
giving some examples.
3. Asks some silly questions (e.g. - Listen carefully.
Why have you got black hair?
Why do we have 10 fingers?
Why can‟t people fly? Why
are there black and white
bears? Why is my sister
naughty?) writes some of these
on the board.
4. Tells students that younger - Listen & look at the
children usually ask silly Arunny‟s picture.
questions. Tells them to look
at Arunny‟s picture in activity
1. She is asking silly questions
to her dad, Avorng.
5. Tells students to guess what - Guess.
Arunny‟s questions are in pairs
/ groups.
6. Tells them to use a concept map - Draw a concept map.
like the one in the book. Tells
them to draw a concept map in
their notebooks.
7. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 3 mins.
8. Collects ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students to listen and check Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen & check.
their guesses. Students listen for the big idea
2. Tells them to compare their - Compare.
answers with their partners /
groups.
3. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 530

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 531
1. Tells students to listen again and Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen & tick.
tick the pictures that Arunny Students listen for the answers
asks about.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions.
3. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partners / - Compare.
groups.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Writes a computer on the board. Activity 4: (7 mins) - Look at the board.

Tells students that they are Writing
computers. What questions do /
can they ask?
2. Collects some ideas from - Share ideas.
students. Writes some of their
ideas on the board. (e.g. what
colour am I? why don‟t have
legs / hands?)
3. Tells them they are something - Listen carefully / respond.
else (e.g. a mobile phone, an
elephant, a pen, a school, a
house, etc.) tells them to choose
what they are.
4. Tells students to write 2 silly - Write 2 silly questions.
questions to ask people.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Tells students to walk around Activity 5: (10 mins) - Ask their questions.
and ask their questions. Speaking
2. Tells them to ask 5 different - Ask 5 different people.
people in the class. Tells them
NOT to write. They have to
remember their classmate‟s
answers.
3. Asks: Who asked the silliest - Respond.
question? Who gave the silliest
answer?
4. Writes some of the
students‟ answers on the
board.
Activity 6: (8 mins) - Work in 3 groups.
1. Puts students into 3 groups. Stirrer – more silly questions - Listen carefully and raise
2. Tells group 1 to write 3 question questions if they have
words in their notebooks / a any.
piece of paper (e.g. why, what,
when). Tells them to number the
words.
3. Tells group 2 to write 3 action
words in their notebooks / a
piece of paper (e.g. eat, drink,
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 532
 write). Tells them to number the

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 533

 words.
4. Tells group 3 to write 3 names of
people / things (e.g. Dara, a lion,
a pen)
5. Asks instruction checking
questions.
6. Shouts out a number (e.g. group
1 – number 2, group 2 – number
2, group 3 – number 1).
7. Writes the words on the board
(e.g. what, drink, Dara).
8. Tells each group to make the
sentence. The first group to
make the sentence wins (e.g.
What does Dara drink?)

Step IV:
1. Asks some students to answer Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
some questions from activity 6. up (2 mins)

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Asks students to make 5 silly Homework: - Listen and take note of the
questions about themselves. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 33 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 534

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 33: More questions
- Lesson B: More questions – Cool superheroes!
- Pages: 202-203
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things that happened in the past and present.
~ Talking about your most memorable day in grade 7.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened in the
past and present & their most memorable day in grade 7 through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Puts students into 2 teams. Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
2. Reads an easy text out of the Warmer: „Say it with feeling!‟ questions if they have
book using a funny voice from any.
one feeling (e.g. Read a text
crying!)
3. Asks students: How do I
feel? Students: sad!
4. Tells students they are going
to play a game. They are going
to have one team member at
the front of the class reading
out a text with a feeling.
Whoever
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 535
 guesses the feeling first gets a

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 536

 point.
5. Chooses 2 team members to
come to the front of the class.
Gives them a text (from the
book) to read.
6. First team to guess gets a point! - Play the game.
Asks instruction checking
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (43 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson B: More questions – Cool
What is the title about? superheroes!

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (2 mins) - Look at the picture.

pictures in activity 1. Lead in
2. In pairs, tells students to guess - Guess.
who they are. What can they
do? What can‟t they do?
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 mins.
4. Collects ideas from the class. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students to match the Activity 2: (3 mins) - Match the words with
words with the pictures in their New words the pictures.
notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
question and gives a time limit
of 2 mins.
3. Tells students to listen and - Listen & check.
check.
4. Tells students to listen and - Listen & repeat.
repeat.

1. Tells students they are going Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen carefully.

to read about a superhero. Students read for the big idea
2. Tells them to guess what - Guess.
special powers the superhero
has in pairs.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 1 minute.
4. Collects ideas from the class. - Share ideas.
5. Tells students to read quickly - Read.
and find out if their guesses were
correct.
6. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 537

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 538
1. Tells students to read the text Activity 4: (7 mins) - Listen carefully.
again and answer the questions Students read for the answers
in their notebooks.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
3. Tells students to compare their - Compare.
answers with their
partners/groups.
4. Checks answers as a class. - Check.

1. Puts students into groups of 3/4. Activity 5: (10 mins) - Work in groups of 3/4.
2. Tells students that they are Writing - Write & draw their
going to write and draw their own superheroes.
own superhero.
3. Tells them to write a fact file - Use the ideas in activity 5.
of their superheroes in their
notebooks / pieces of paper.
Tells them to use the ideas in
activity 5.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

1. Chooses one student from each Activity 6: (7 mins) - Choose on student from
team to report about their work. Speaking each team to report their
2. Calls each reporter in front of work.
the class. Tells them to talk - Talk about their work for 1
about their work for 1 minute. minute.
3. Asks the other students to think
of one question for the reporting - Think of 1 question to ask.
team. Reminds them to listen to
others.
4. Displays some of the
students‟ work. - Display their work.
5. Have a class vote to see which of
the pictures students like best. - Have a class vote!

1. Tells each group to choose one Activity 7: (9 mins)

superhero that the other groups Speaking – role play - Listen carefully.
wrote / drew.
2. Tells them to write 3 questions
to ask the superhero. - Write 3 questions to ask the
3. Asks instruction checking superhero.
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.
4. Choose one student in each
group to be the superhero. - Choose 1student to be the
5. Tells students to take it in turns superhero.
to ask their questions. - Take turns to ask questions.
Encourages the superheroes of
each team to give silly answers.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 539

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 540
 Step IV:
1. Asks some students their Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
favourite superheroes. up (2 mins)
2. If they haven‟t finished,
tells them to continue
drawing / writing /
colouring their superheroes
for homework.
Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Asks students to draw and color Homework: - Listen and take note of the
a superhero they like most. homework.
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 33 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 541

 Lesson Plan

- Grade 7:
- Chapter 11: I can remember everything
- Unit 33: More questions
- Lesson C: More questions – My best memories
- Pages: 204-205
- Duration: 50 mins
I. Aim:
~ Talking about things that happened in the past and present.
~ Talking about your most memorable day in grade 7.
II. Objective (s): At the end of the lesson, students will be able to introduce things that happened in the
past and present & their most memorable day in grade 7 through speaking & writing correctly &
appropriately.
III. Teaching Materials: - Student‟s book & Teacher‟s guide book
IV. Procedures:

Teacher’s Activity Contents Student’s Activity

Step I:
Opening (2 mins)
1. Greets the whole class: - Greeting 1. Whole class stands up & greets
back:
- Good morning everyone! - Good morning teacher!

2. Checks attendance: - Attendant record 2. Individual/ class monitor reports

- How many students are students who are absent today.
absent today?

3. Checks hygiene: - Praise or give advice 3. Individual/ class monitor reports

- Which group is in charge of the group that‟s in charge of
cleaning the class today? cleaning the class today.

4. Asks about the date & writes on - The date: 4. Whole class/individual responds:
the whiteboard:
- What day is it today? - Today is:
- What is the date? - The date is:

Step II:
1. Tells students to ask you any Warmer/Review (5 mins) - Listen carefully and raise
questions they want. Answers Warmer: „Banana-na‟ questions if they have
each question with Banana-na any.
without pausing! Hold as long
as you can. Answers 2 questions
like this.
2. Tells students that they are
going to play this game in
groups.
3. Tells students to work in groups
and choose one person to be
„it‟.
4. The student has to answer 2
Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 542
 questions with Banana-na. They
cannot laugh or pause. If they

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 543

 can answer each question with
Banana-na without breaking,
they get 5 points. If the group
makes them laugh, they get one
point.
5. Asks instruction checking - Play the game.
questions.

Step III:
1. Elicits & writes the title of new Introducing New Lesson (40 mins) - Whole class responds.
lesson on the board. Lesson C: More questions – My
What is the title about? best memories

1. Tells students to look at the Activity 1: (5 mins) - Look at the pictures.

pictures in activity 1. Tells them Lead in
each picture shows a memorable
event.
2. Writes memorable on the board. - Guess.
Asks questions to help students
understand what it means (e.g.
when something is memorable,
do we forget easily? Do we
remember?)
3. Tells students to talk about the - Work in pairs/ Talk about the
pictures in pairs. pictures.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions.
5. Collects ideas from students. - Share ideas.

1. Tells students that they are Activity 2: (3 mins) - Listen carefully.

going to listen to the most Students listen for the big idea
memorable days in grade 7 of
Sophal, Dara, Bopha and
Avorng. - Listen & point to the pictures
2. Tells students to listen and point of the characters.
to the pictures of the characters
as they listen.
3. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare.
4. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partners /
groups. - Check.
5. Checks answers as a class.
Activity 3: (5 min) - Listen again & answer.
1. Tells students to listen again and Students listen for the answers
answer the questions.
2. Asks instruction checking
questions. - Compare.
3. Tells students to compare their
answers with their partners /
groups. - Check.
4. Checks answers as a class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 544

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 545
1. Tells students to write about Activity 4: (10 mins) - Write about their most
their most memorable day in Writing memorable day in grade 7.
grade 7 on pieces of paper.
2. Tells them NOT to write their - NOT to write their names on
names on their paper. their paper!
3. If necessary, gives them time to - Read the tapescript to gets some
read the tapescript quickly to ideas.
get some ideas.
4. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 8 mins.

1. Collects the papers from Activity 5: (7 mins) - Give the papers to the teacher.
each student. Speaking
2. Tells students that you are - Listen carefully.
going to give them their
classmate‟s writing.
3. Tells them to look for the writer - Look for the writer.
by asking questions (e.g. Who is
your best friend? Did you get
100% in your English test?)
4. Gives the paper back to the
students. Make sure students do
not get their own papers!
5. Asks instruction checking
questions and gives a time limit
of 5 mins.

1. Writes I like you because… on Activity 6: (10 mins) - Look at the board.
the board. Writing
2. Asks some students to complete - Complete.
the sentence about their
classmate / best friend / teacher.
3. Tells them to write short - Write short sentences.
sentences like this about their
classmates. Tells them to write
on small pieces of paper.
4. Tells them to write as many - Write as many people as they
people as they like. like.
5. Asks instruction checking
questions (e.g. Are we writing
good things or bad things?) and
gives a time limit of 7 mins.
6. Tells students to go around - Give their notes to
and give their notes to their their classmates.
classmates.
7. Asks who has the most number - Respond.
of notes.
8. Asks some students to read some - Read their notes.
of the notes they received in
front of the class.

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 546

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 547
 Step IV:
1. Asks students to look at the Learner assessment and lesson wrap - Respond.
„can do‟ statements. up (5 mins)
2. Compare with a partner. I can ask and answer questions - Compare.
3. Asks students how they feel about people do every day. - Respond.
about the „can do‟ I can write a short story about my
statements. most memorable day.
I can remember some words and
stories from the book.

Step V:
Closing (2 mins)
1. Asks students to write as many Homework: - Listen and take note of the
sentences as they can with I homework.
like my parents because …
2. Tells students to read the word Reminders: - Listen and take note.
list for unit 33 on page 209 in
the student‟s book.
3. Says goodbye to the class. Goodbye! - Say goodbye to the teacher.

Teacher‟s self reflection on today‟s lesson: ..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................

Prepared by: Mr. Pal Samuth 548